Krone BA Comprima V 150 XC Plus (RP801-31) Operating Instructions

Original Operating Instructions

Document no.: 150001178_00_en

Status: 28/02/2020

RP801-31

Round Baler

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

From machine no.: 1014260

Contact

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10

48480 Spelle

Germany

Telephone main office + 49 (0) 59 77/935-0

Telefax main office

Telefax spare parts warehouse national territory

+ 49 (0) 59 77/935-339

+ 49 (0) 59 77/935-239

Telefax spare parts warehouse export + 49 (0) 59 77/935-359

Internet www.landmaschinen.krone.de

https://mediathek.krone.de/

Information for enquiries and orders

Type

Vehicle identification number

Year of manufacture

Contact data of your dealer

2

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

2

2.4.10

2.4.11

2.4.12

2.4.13

2.4.14

2.4.15

2.4.16

2.4.17

2.4.18

2.4.19

2.4.20

2.4.21

2.5

2.5.1

2.5.2

2.5.3

2.5.4

2.6

2.7

2.7.1

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.4.1

2.4.2

2.4.3

2.4.4

2.4.5

2.4.6

2.4.7

2.4.8

2.4.9

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.5.1

1.5.2

1.5.3

1.5.4

1.5.5

1.5.6

1.5.7

3

4

4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

5

5.1

5.1.1

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Contents

Information on This Document.................................................................................................  9

Validity .........................................................................................................................................  9

Re-ordering ..................................................................................................................................  9

Applicable documents..................................................................................................................  9

Target group of this document .....................................................................................................  9

How to use this document ...........................................................................................................  9

Directories and references...........................................................................................................  9

Information on direction .............................................................................................................  10

Term “machine”..........................................................................................................................  10

Figures .......................................................................................................................................  10

Scope of the document ..............................................................................................................  10

Means of representation ............................................................................................................  10

Conversion table ........................................................................................................................  12

Safety ........................................................................................................................................  14

Intended use ..............................................................................................................................  14

Reasonably foreseeable misuse................................................................................................  14

Service life of the machine.........................................................................................................  15

Basic safety instructions ............................................................................................................  15

Importance of operating instructions..........................................................................................  15

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel ....................................................................  15

Personnel qualification of the technicians..................................................................................  16

Children in danger .....................................................................................................................  16

Connecting the machine ............................................................................................................  16

Structural modifications on the machine ....................................................................................  16

Additional equipment and spare parts .......................................................................................  16

Jobs on the machine..................................................................................................................  17

Operational safety: Technically sound condition .......................................................................  17

Danger zones ............................................................................................................................  18

Ensuring functionality of safety devices .....................................................................................  20

Personal protective equipment ..................................................................................................  20

Safety markings on the machine ...............................................................................................  21

Road safety................................................................................................................................  21

Parking the machine safely .......................................................................................................  22

Consumables .............................................................................................................................  22

Dangers arising from environment.............................................................................................  22

Sources of danger on the machine ............................................................................................  24

Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine ....................................  25

Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and tyres..............................  26

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents .....................................................  27

Safety routines ...........................................................................................................................  27

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine...........................................................................  27

Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering..................................................  27

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely.......................................  28

Running actuator test.................................................................................................................  28

Safety labels on the machine.....................................................................................................  29

Safety equipment .......................................................................................................................  34

SMV emblem .............................................................................................................................  36

Data memory ............................................................................................................................  37

Machine description ................................................................................................................  38

Machine overview ......................................................................................................................  38

Overload protections on the machine ........................................................................................  38

Identification plate ......................................................................................................................  39

Function description net wrapping .............................................................................................  40

Function description net and chamber film wrapping ................................................................  41

Function description cutting unit ................................................................................................  41

Technical data ..........................................................................................................................  42

Consumables .............................................................................................................................  44

Oils.............................................................................................................................................  44

3

Contents

5.1.2

6

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.6.1

6.6.2

6.6.3

6.7

8

8.12.1

8.12.2

8.12.3

8.13

8.13.1

8.13.2

8.13.3

8.14

8.14.1

8.14.2

8.15

8.15.1

8.15.2

8.16

8.16.1

8.16.2

8.16.3

8.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

8.9

8.10

8.11

8.12

8.1

8.2

8.3

8.3.1

8.3.2

8.3.3

8.4

7

7.1

7.2

7.3

7.4

7.5

7.6

7.7

7.8

7.9

7.10

7.11

7.12

7.13

Lubricating greases ...................................................................................................................  44

Initial operation ........................................................................................................................  45

Scope of delivery .......................................................................................................................  45

Mounting hose and cable support..............................................................................................  47

Preparing the brake disc of the wrapping material brake ..........................................................  47

Checking/adapting the tyre pressure .........................................................................................  47

Adjusting the drawbar height .....................................................................................................  48

Universal shaft ...........................................................................................................................  49

Adjusting the length of the universal shaft .................................................................................  49

Mounting universal shaft bracket ...............................................................................................  50

Mounting the universal shaft on the machine ............................................................................  51

Mounting the bale ejector ..........................................................................................................  51

Commissioning ........................................................................................................................  55

Connecting machine to tractor ...................................................................................................  55

Mounting the universal shaft on the tractor................................................................................  56

Connecting hydraulic hoses.......................................................................................................  57

Connecting hydraulic brake (export) ..........................................................................................  58

Coupling the hydraulic auxiliary brake .......................................................................................  58

Connecting/disconnecting compressed air connections for the compressed air brake .............  59

Adjusting drawbar eye ...............................................................................................................  59

Connecting KRONE terminal DS 500 ........................................................................................  60

Connecting the KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200)...............................................  62

Connecting foreign ISOBUS terminal ........................................................................................  64

Connecting the camera to the KRONE ISOBUS terminal CCI 800 or CCI 1200 .......................  66

Connecting the road lighting ......................................................................................................  66

Mounting safety chain ................................................................................................................  67

Operation ..................................................................................................................................  69

Preparation before baling ..........................................................................................................  69

Filling the bale chamber.............................................................................................................  69

Improving bale chamber filling ...................................................................................................  71

Reducing the pressure on the side walls of the bale chamber ..................................................  71

Mounting additional driver guide rails on the starter roller .........................................................  72

Mounting additional deflector sheets in the tailgate ...................................................................  72

Completing the baling process, starting tying cycle and ejecting round bales...........................  73

Moving bale formation conveyors into the working / parking position........................................  73

Operating the support jack.........................................................................................................  73

Using the stop cock of the tailgate .............................................................................................  76

Releasing/applying the parking brake........................................................................................  76

Fitting wheel chocks ..................................................................................................................  77

Removing/mounting the safety device which prevents unauthorised use .................................  78

Operating brake force regulator .................................................................................................  79

Pick-up .......................................................................................................................................  79

Bringing the pick-up to transport/working position .....................................................................  79

Setting the pick-up working height .............................................................................................  80

Adjusting the bearing pressure relief for the pick-up .................................................................  81

Crop press roller unit .................................................................................................................  81

Setting the crop press roller unit ................................................................................................  82

Setting the baffle sheet on the crop press roller unit .................................................................  82

Removing/mounting the baffle sheet on the crop press roller unit.............................................  83

Cutting unit.................................................................................................................................  84

Lifting/lowering blade cassette...................................................................................................  84

Swivelling blade groups in/out ...................................................................................................  84

Net wrapping..............................................................................................................................  87

Inserting the net roll ...................................................................................................................  87

Insert net ....................................................................................................................................  89

Net and chamber film wrapping .................................................................................................  90

Inserting a net or film roll ...........................................................................................................  90

Inserting the net or film ..............................................................................................................  91

Notes on operation ....................................................................................................................  94

4

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Contents

11

11.1

12

12.1

12.2

12.3

12.4

12.5

12.6

12.7

12.8

12.9

12.10

12.10.1

12.10.2

12.10.3

12.10.4

12.11

12.11.1

12.11.2

13

13.1

13.2

13.3

13.4

13.5

13.6

13.7

13.8

13.9

13.10

13.11

13.12

13.13

13.14

13.15

13.16

13.17

13.18

13.19

13.20

9

9.1

9.2

9.3

10

10.1

10.2

10.3

10.4

10.5

8.16.4

8.17

8.18

8.18.1

8.18.2

8.18.3

8.18.4

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Checking the tension of the inserted film ...................................................................................  95

Using the bale ejector ................................................................................................................  96

Removing crop blockages .........................................................................................................  96

Crop blockage at the right-hand and left-hand end of the pick-up .............................................  96

Crop blockage in the pick-up .....................................................................................................  96

Crop blockage under the cutting rotor .......................................................................................  97

Crop blockage in the baling element .........................................................................................  98

KRONE Terminal DS 500 .........................................................................................................  99

Touchable display ......................................................................................................................  99

Switching terminal on/off............................................................................................................  99

Design DS 500.........................................................................................................................  100

KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200) ....................................................................  102

Touchable display ....................................................................................................................  102

Switching terminal on/off..........................................................................................................  103

Design of display .....................................................................................................................  104

Design of the KRONE machine application .............................................................................  104

Setting units on the terminal ....................................................................................................  105

Foreign ISOBUS terminal ......................................................................................................  106

Varying functions to KRONE ISOBUS terminal .......................................................................  106

Terminal machine functions .................................................................................................  107

Status line ................................................................................................................................  107

Keys .........................................................................................................................................  108

Displays on the working screen ...............................................................................................  110

Displays on the information bar ...............................................................................................  113

Direction display ......................................................................................................................  113

Accessing the working screen .................................................................................................  114

Automatic call of the Road travel screen .................................................................................  115

Adjusting bale diameter ...........................................................................................................  116

Operating the hydraulic blade group control system ...............................................................  116

Operating TIM 1.0 (Tractor Implement Management) .............................................................  118

Mode of operation of TIM 1.0...................................................................................................  118

TIM displays and keys on the working screen .........................................................................  119

Activating TIM functions...........................................................................................................  120

Pausing TIM functions .............................................................................................................  121

Operating machine via joystick ................................................................................................  121

Auxiliary functions (AUX) .........................................................................................................  121

Auxiliary assignment of a joystick ............................................................................................  122

Terminal menus .....................................................................................................................  124

Menu Structure ........................................................................................................................  124

Recurring icons ........................................................................................................................  125

Selecting a menu Level ...........................................................................................................  126

Selecting a menu .....................................................................................................................  126

Changing value ........................................................................................................................  127

Changing mode .......................................................................................................................  128

Tying in the menu level ............................................................................................................  129

Menu 1 “Number of net layers” (net wrapping) ........................................................................  130

Menu 1 “Number of film layers” (chamber film wrapping) ........................................................  130

Menu 3 “Advance signalling” ...................................................................................................  131

Menu 4 “Tying start delay” (net wrapping) ...............................................................................  131

Menu 4 “Tying start delay” (chamber film wrapping) ...............................................................  132

Menu 6 "Electronic baling pressure adjustment" .....................................................................  133

Menu 7 “Sensitivity of direction display” ..................................................................................  134

Menu 8 “Type of tying” (for the “Net and chamber film wrapping” version) .............................  134

Menu 9 “Filling correction” .......................................................................................................  135

Menu 10 "Manual operation" (for the "Net wrapping" version).................................................  136

Menu 10 “Manual operation” (for the “Net and chamber film wrapping” version) ....................  137

Menu 11 "Central lubrication" ..................................................................................................  138

Menu 13 "Counters".................................................................................................................  139

5

Contents

15

15.6

15.7

15.8

15.9

15.10

15.11

15.12

15.13

15.1

15.2

15.3

15.4

15.5

15.5.1

15.5.2

15.5.3

15.14

15.15

15.16

16

16.1

16.1.1

16.1.2

16.1.3

16.1.4

16.1.5

16.1.6

16.1.7

16.1.8

16.1.9

16.2

16.3

16.4

16.5

14

14.1

14.2

14.3

14.4

14.5

14.5.1

14.5.2

14.5.3

14.5.4

13.20.1

13.20.2

13.21

13.21.1

13.21.2

13.21.3

13.22

Menu 13-1 “Customer counter”................................................................................................  140

Menu 13-2 "Total counter" .......................................................................................................  142

Menu 14 "ISOBUS"..................................................................................................................  143

Menu 14-5 "KRONE SmartConnect" .......................................................................................  143

Menu 14-6 "Configuring TIM software" (for "TIM 1.0" version) ................................................  144

Menu 14-9 "Switching between terminals"...............................................................................  146

Menu 15 "Settings" ..................................................................................................................  147

13.22.1

Menu 15-1 "Sensor test" ..........................................................................................................  147

13.22.1.1

Adjusting sensor B08 “Top blade cassette” .............................................................................  150

13.22.1.2

Adjusting sensor B09/B10 “Filling display left/right”.................................................................  150

13.22.1.3

Adjusting sensor B61 “Tying 1 (passive)” ................................................................................  151

13.22.2

13.22.3

13.22.4

Menu 15-2 "Actuator test" ........................................................................................................  151

Menu 15-3 "Software info" .......................................................................................................  154

Menu 15-4 "Error list"...............................................................................................................  154

Driving and transport ............................................................................................................  157

Preparing the machine for road travel .....................................................................................  158

Parking the machine ................................................................................................................  158

Securing the universal shaft ....................................................................................................  158

Checking road travel lighting ...................................................................................................  159

Preparing the machine for shipment ........................................................................................  160

Securing the side hoods ..........................................................................................................  160

Securing the storage compartment flap ...................................................................................  161

Securing the guide wheels of the pick-up ................................................................................  161

Lifting the machine...................................................................................................................  161

Settings...................................................................................................................................  163

Setting the baling pressure ......................................................................................................  163

Setting the bale diameter .........................................................................................................  163

Setting the density of the bale core .........................................................................................  163

Setting the cutting length .........................................................................................................  165

Checking and setting the position of the feed rocker arm........................................................  166

Checking and adjusting the feed position ................................................................................  167

Checking and setting end position for chamber film wrapping ................................................  168

Checking and setting end position for net wrapping ................................................................  169

Setting wrapping material overhang ........................................................................................  169

Setting wrapping material brake ..............................................................................................  170

Setting the brake force release when feeding wrapping material ............................................  172

Checking and setting the axial play of the brake disc at the wrapping material brake ............  173

Locking/releasing the tension lever .........................................................................................  174

Setting the lock of the tapered roller ........................................................................................  175

Checking the retaining comb for net wrapping ........................................................................  176

Checking the retaining comb for chamber film wrapping .........................................................  177

Setting the retaining comb for chamber film wrapping.............................................................  178

Setting the working lights .........................................................................................................  179

Setting oil quantities for the central chain lubrication unit ........................................................  180

Maintenance ...........................................................................................................................  182

Maintenance table ...................................................................................................................  182

Maintenance – Before the season ...........................................................................................  182

Maintenance – After the season ..............................................................................................  183

Maintenance – once after 10 hours .........................................................................................  183

Maintenance – once after 50 hours .........................................................................................  184

Maintenance – every 10 hours, at least daily ..........................................................................  184

Maintenance – every 50 hours ................................................................................................  184

Maintenance – every 500 hours ..............................................................................................  184

Maintenance – Every 1,000 round bales .................................................................................  184

Maintenance – Every 2 years ..................................................................................................  184

Lubrication chart ......................................................................................................................  185

Lubricating the universal shaft .................................................................................................  188

Tightening torques ...................................................................................................................  188

Checking/maintaining tyres......................................................................................................  191

6

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

17

17.1

17.2

17.3

17.4

17.5

17.5.1

17.5.1.1

17.5.2

17.5.3

17.5.4

17.6

16.19

16.20

16.21

16.21.1

16.21.2

16.21.3

16.21.4

16.21.5

16.22

16.23

16.24

16.25

16.25.1

16.25.2

16.26

16.26.1

16.6

16.7

16.8

16.9

16.10

16.11

16.12

16.13

16.14

16.14.1

16.14.2

16.15

16.16

16.17

16.18

16.26.2

16.27

16.27.1

16.27.2

16.27.3

16.28

16.28.1

16.28.2

16.28.3

18

18.1

18.1.1

18.1.2

18.1.3

18.1.4

18.1.5

18.2

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Contents

Servicing the main gearbox .....................................................................................................  193

Checking hydraulic hoses ........................................................................................................  194

Cleaning the machine ..............................................................................................................  194

Cleaning deflection pipes or conical tying roller.......................................................................  194

Clean the bushing and the drawbar eye ..................................................................................  196

Cleaning drive chains ..............................................................................................................  197

Protecting brake disc of the wrapping material brake from corrosion ......................................  197

Checking the screw connections on the drawbar ....................................................................  197

Setting the scraper and stone deflector ...................................................................................  198

Setting the scraper to the spiral roller ......................................................................................  198

Setting the stone deflectors .....................................................................................................  200

Releasing the cam clutch on the universal shaft .....................................................................  200

Changing the blades ................................................................................................................  200

Unlocking/locking blade retaining shaft ...................................................................................  201

Checking and moving the blade retaining shaft .......................................................................  202

Grinding the blades..................................................................................................................  203

Checking/lubricating the safety rolls of the single blade locking device ..................................  204

Adjust drive chains...................................................................................................................  204

Drive chain of the pick-up ........................................................................................................  205

Drive chain of the intake ..........................................................................................................  206

Drive chain of the bale formation conveyor .............................................................................  206

Drive chain of the auger conveyor ...........................................................................................  207

Drive chain of the starter roller and the lower compression roller............................................  208

Checking rear bale formation conveyor ...................................................................................  208

Moving deflection roll on the rear bale formation conveyor .....................................................  209

Checking and setting the axial play of the brake disc at the wrapping material brake ............  210

Maintaining the central lubrication unit ....................................................................................  210

Distributor blocks of the central lubrication unit .......................................................................  210

Filling the lubricant tank ...........................................................................................................  213

Servicing chain lubrication unit ................................................................................................  216

Checking oil level, topping up oil and cleaning filter ................................................................  216

Distribution of the oil brushes on the machine .........................................................................  217

Servicing compressed air brake (for version with "Compressed air brake") ............................  218

Cleaning air filter ......................................................................................................................  218

Drain condensation water from the compressed air tank ........................................................  219

Retighten tensioning straps at the compressed air tank ..........................................................  220

Servicing the hydraulic system ................................................................................................  221

Before working on the hydraulic system ..................................................................................  221

Solenoid valves........................................................................................................................  222

Changing the hydraulic oil filter element ..................................................................................  222

Malfunction, cause and remedy ...........................................................................................  224

Disturbances at the pick-up or during picking up of crops .......................................................  224

Disturbances during or after the baling process ......................................................................  225

Disturbances at the tying unit or during the tying cycle ...........................................................  227

Malfunctions on the chain lubrication unit ................................................................................  229

Faults of the electrics/electronics.............................................................................................  230

Error Messages........................................................................................................................  230

Possible error types (FMI)........................................................................................................  231

Overview of fuses ....................................................................................................................  232

Remedying sensor/actuator error ............................................................................................  232

Error list....................................................................................................................................  233

Setting the tailgate lock............................................................................................................  256

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians ...........................................................  257

Servicing the brake system......................................................................................................  257

Checking the pad thickness of the brake shoes ......................................................................  258

Checking the stroke of the brake cylinders ..............................................................................  258

Setting brake lever on the single axle ......................................................................................  258

Setting mechanical slack adjuster on the single axle ..............................................................  259

Setting transmission linkage and brake lever on the tandem axle...........................................  260

Car jack contact points ............................................................................................................  263

7

Contents

19

20

20.1

21

22

Waste disposal.......................................................................................................................  264

Appendix.................................................................................................................................  265

Hydraulic diagram ....................................................................................................................  265

Index........................................................................................................................................  267

Declaration of conformity .....................................................................................................  277

8

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.5.1

Information on This Document

Validity

1

1.1

Information on This Document

Validity

This document is valid for machines of type:

RP801-31 (Comprima V 150 XC Plus)

All information, illustrations and technical data in this document correspond to the latest state at the time of publication.

We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Re-ordering

If this document has become unusable in whole or in part, you can order a replacement, quoting the document number on the cover sheet. The document can additionally be downloaded via

KRONE MEDIA  https://mediathek.krone.de/ .

Applicable documents

To ensure that the machine is used safely and as intended, observe the following further applicable documents.

• Operating instructions for universal shaft

• Operating instructions terminal

• Operating instructions for camera system (for version with "net wrapping and chamber film wrapping")

• Operating instructions for central lubrication unit

Target group of this document

This document aims at the operator of the machine who fulfills the minimum requirements of personnel qualification,

refer to page 15

.

How to use this document

Directories and references

Contents/headers

The contents and headers in this document ensure quick orientation in the chapters.

Index

The index contains catchwords in alphabetical order which enable to find information on a desired topic easily. The index can be found on the last pages of this document.

Cross references

Cross references to another place in the document or to another document are in the text with page number.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 9

1

1.5

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Examples:

• Check all screws on the machine for firm attachment,

refer to page 10

. ( INFORMATION : If you use this document in electronic form, you get to the link to the stated page by clicking with the mouse.)

• For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the universal shaft manufacturer.

1.5.2

1.5.3

Information on direction

Directional information in this document, such as front, rear, right and left, applies in the direction of travel of the machine.

Term “machine”

Throughout the rest of this document, the “round baler” will also be referred to as the “machine”.

1.5.4

1.5.5

1.5.6

Figures

The figures in this document do not always represent the exact machine type. The information that refers to the figure always corresponds to the machine type of this document.

Scope of the document

In addition to standard equipment, accessories kits and versions of the machine are described in this document. Your machine may deviate from this document.

Means of representation

Icons in the text

The following means of representation (icons) are used to present the text more clearly:

This arrow characterizes an action step . Several arrows in a row identify a sequence of actions to be performed step by step.

This icon identifies a prerequisite that has to be fulfilled to perform an action step or a sequence of actions.

This arrow marks the intermediate result of an action step.

This arrow identifies the result of an action step or sequence of actions.

This bullet point identifies an enumeration . If the bullet point is intended, it identifies the second level of the enumeration.

Icons in figures

The following icons can be used in illustrations:

10

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Icon

1

X

LH

Explanation

Reference sign for part

Dimensions (e. g. also W = width,

H = height, L = length)

Left side of machine

Direction of travel

Reference line for visible material

Centre line

Open

Apply liquid lubricant (e.g. lubricating oil)

Icon

I

RH

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Explanation

Position of a part (e.g. move from position I to position II)

Magnification of display detail

Right side of machine

Direction of motion

Reference line for covered material

Cable routes

Closed

Apply lubricating grease

1

1.5

Warning signs

Warnings of dangers are separated from the remaining text as warning signs and are identified with a danger sign and signal words.

The warning signs must be read and the measures must be observed in order to prevent personal injury.

Explanation of danger sign

This is the danger sign that warns of a risk of injury.

Please observe all notes marked with the danger sign in order to avoid injuries or death.

Explanation of signal words

DANGER

The signal word DANGER warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries or death if the warning sign is ignored.

WARNING

The signal word WARNING warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries or death if the warning sign is ignored.

CAUTION

The signal word CAUTION warns of a hazardous situation which will result in minor to moderate injuries if the warning sign is ignored.

Example of a warning sign:

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 11

1

1.5

Information on This Document

How to use this document

1.5.7

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles

When cleaning with compressed air, dirt particles are ejected at high speed and could get into the eyes. Therefore eyes could be hurt.

„ Keep people away from the working area.

„ Wear personal protective equipment when performing cleaning work with compressed air

(e.g. eye protection).

Warnings of property damage/environmental damage

Warnings of property/environmental damage are separated from the remaining text and marked with "Notice".

Example:

NOTICE

Gearbox damage due to low oil level

The gearboxes could be damaged when the oil level is too low.

„ Check gear oil level at regular intervals and top up oil, if necessary.

„ Check gear oil level approx. 3 to 4 hours after the machine has been switched off. Check oil level only when machine is in horizontal position.

Notes with information and recommendations

Additional information and recommendations for trouble-free and productive operation of the machine are separated from the remaining text and marked with “Information”.

Example:

INFORMATION

Each safety label is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the manufacturer or from the authorized specialist dealer.

Conversion table

The following table can be used to convert metric units into US units.

Size

Area

Volume flow Litres per minute L/min

Cubic metres per hour m³/h

Force

Length

Power

SI units (metric)

Unit name Abbreviation

Hectare ha

Newton

Millimetre

Metre

Kilowatt

N mm m kW

Factor

2.47105

0.2642

4.4029

0.2248

0.03937

3.2808

1.3410

Inch-pound units

Unit name

Acre

US gallons per minute

Pound force

Inch

Foot

Horsepower

Abbreviation acres gpm lbf in.

ft.

hp

12

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Size

Pressure

Torque

Velocity

SI units (metric)

Unit name Abbreviation

Kilopascal kPa

Megapascal bar (non-SI)

Newtonmeter

MPa bar

Nm

Temperature Degrees Celsius °C

Information on This Document

How to use this document

Factor

0.1450

145.0377

14.5038

0.7376

Inch-pound units

Unit name Abbreviation

Pounds per square inch psi

8.8507

°Cx1.8+32

3.2808

pound-foot or foot-pound ft∙lbf pound-inch or inch-pound

Degrees

Fahrenheit in∙lbf

°F

Feet per minute ft/min

1

1.5

Volumes

Weight

Metres per minute

Metres per second

Kilometres per hour

Litres

Millilitre

Cubic centimetre

Kilogram m/min m/s km/h

L ml cm³ kg

3.2808

0.6215

0.2642

0.0338

0.0610

2.2046

Feet per second ft/s

Miles per hour mph

US gallon

US ounce

Cubic inch

US gal.

US oz.

in³

Pound lbs

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 13

2

2.1

2

Safety

Intended use

Safety

2.1

2.2

Intended use

This machine is a round baler and is used to press crops to round bales.

The crops designated for the intended use of this machine are cut stalk and leaf crops.

The machine is designed exclusively for use in agriculture and may only be used when

• all safety devices are available according to the operating instructions and are located in the protective position.

• all safety instructions of the operating instructions have been observed and complied with,

both in chapter “Basic safety instructions”, refer to page 15

, and directly in the chapters of the operating instructions.

The machine may be used only by people who satisfy the personnel qualification requirements

designated by the machine manufacturer, refer to page 15

.

These operating instructions are part of the machine and must therefore be at hand when the machine is in use. The machine may be operated only when the operator has received training and in compliance with these operating instructions.

If the machine is used for applications which are not described in these operating instructions, this may result in serious injuries or death and damage to the machine and other property.

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt the proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications shall exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

The intended use shall also include the adherence to the operating, maintenance and repair conditions set by the manufacturer.

Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Any use beyond the intended use

refer to page 14 is regarded as improper use and is therefore

misuse according to the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer is not liable for damage resulting from this, the user alone bears the risk.

Such misuse is for example:

•

Processing of crops which are outside the intended use of the machine, refer to page 14

• Transport of people

• Transport of goods

• Exceeding the permitted technical gross weight

• Non-compliance with the safety labels on the machine and safety notes in the operating instructions

• Performing troubleshooting, setting, cleaning, repair and maintenance work contrary to the information in the operating instructions

• Unauthorised modifications to the machine

• Attachment of unauthorised or unapproved additional equipment

• Use of spare parts which are not KRONE original spare parts

• Stationary operation of the machine

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications will exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.

14

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

2.3

2.4

2.4.1

2.4.2

Safety

Service life of the machine

Service life of the machine

• The service life of this machine depends on its proper operation and maintenance as well as the operating and harvesting conditions.

• By heeding the instructions and information in these operating instructions, permanent operational readiness and a long service life of the machine can be achieved.

• After each operating season, inspect the entire machine for wear and other damage.

• Replace damaged and worn components before recommissioning the machine.

• Carry out a full technical inspection of the machine after five years of machine operation and make a decision on further machine usage taking the results of this inspection into account.

• Theoretically, the service life of this machine is unlimited as all worn or damaged components can be replaced.

2

2.3

Basic safety instructions

Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings

Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings may result in injuries and damage to the environment and property.

Importance of operating instructions

The operating instructions are an important document and a part of the machine. They are intended for the user and contain information relevant to safety.

Only the procedures indicated in the operating instructions are reliable. If the operating instructions are not followed, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Before using the machine for the first time, read and follow all the "Basic safety instructions".

„ Before working, also read and observe the respective sections in the operating instructions.

„ Keep the operating instructions easily accessible for the machine user at all times.

„ Keep the operating instructions ready to hand for the user of the machine in the document storage tube,

refer to page 38 .

„ Hand over the operating instructions to subsequent users.

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel

If the machine is not used properly, people may be seriously injured or killed. To avoid accidents, each person who works with the machine must satisfy the following minimum requirements:

• He is physically capable of controlling the machine.

• He can work safely with the machine in accordance with these operating instructions.

• He understands the method of operation of the machine within the scope of his work and can identify and avoid the dangers associated with the work.

• He has read the operating instructions and can implement the information in the operating instructions accordingly.

• He is familiar with driving vehicles safely.

• For road travel he has adequate knowledge of the highway code and has the stipulated driving licence.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 15

2

2.4

2.4.3

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Personnel qualification of the technicians

If the work (assembly, conversion, modification, extension, repairs, retrofitting) is performed improperly on the machine, people may be seriously or fatally injured. To avoid accidents, everyone who performs work according to these instructions must meet the following minimum requirements:

• Qualified professional, with relevant training.

• Capable of assembling the (partially) disassembled machine according to the assembly instructions provided by the manufacturer.

• Capable of extending, modifying or repairing the function of the machine according to the relevant instructions provided by the manufacturer.

• Ability to perform the work safely according to these instructions.

• Understands the mode of operation of the work to be performed and the machine and is able to identify and avoid risk in carrying out the necessary work.

• Has read these instructions and is able to implement the information explained in these instructions accordingly.

2.4.4

Children in danger

Children are not in a position to assess dangers and behave unpredictably.

Thus children are particularly at risk.

„ Keep children away from the machine.

„ Keep children away from consumables.

„ Make sure that there are no children in the danger zone, especially when starting and triggering machine movements.

2.4.5

2.4.6

2.4.7

Connecting the machine

When tractor and machine are not correctly connected, there is a risk of causing serious accidents.

„ When connecting, follow all operating instructions:

• the operating instructions of the tractor

•

the operating instructions of the machine, refer to page 55

• the operating instructions of universal shaft

„ Observe the changed driving behaviour of the combination.

Structural modifications on the machine

Structural changes and enhancements may impair the functionality and operational safety of the machine. People may be seriously injured or killed as a result.

Structural changes and enhancements are not permitted.

Additional equipment and spare parts

Additional equipment and spare parts that do not correspond to the requirements of the manufacturer may affect the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ To ensure operational safety, use original parts or standard parts which correspond to the requirements of the manufacturer.

16

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

2.4.8

2.4.9

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

Jobs on the machine

Passengers

Passengers may be seriously injured by the machine or fall off the machine and run over.

Ejected objects may strike and injure passengers.

„ Never carry passengers on the machine.

Operational safety: Technically sound condition

Operation is only allowed after proper start-up

The operational safety of the machine is not ensured when it is not started up properly according to these operating instructions. Thus accidents may be caused and persons may be seriously injured and killed.

„

Only use the machine after proper start-up, refer to page 55 .

Technically sound state of the machine

Improper maintenance and setting could influence the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ All maintenance and setting work must be performed according to the chapters

“Maintenance and Setting”.

„ Before performing any maintenance and setting work, shut down and safeguard the machine,

refer to page 27 .

Danger resulting from damage to the machine

Damage to the machine may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed. The following parts of the machine are particularly important for safety:

• Brakes

• Steering

• Safety Devices

• Connecting devices

• Lighting

• Hydraulics

• Tyres

• Universal shaft

If there are doubts about the operational safety of the machine, for example due to an unexpected change to the operational behaviour, visible damage or leaking consumables:

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27

.

„ Immediately eliminate potential causes of damage, for example heavy soiling, or tighten slack screws.

„ Determine the cause of damage according to these operating instructions and repair the

damage, if possible, refer to page 224 .

„ In case of damage which may affect operational safety and cannot be repaired according to these operating instructions: Have damage repaired by a qualified service centre.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 17

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Technical limit values

If the technical limit values of the machine are not observed, the machine may be damaged. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured. With regard to safety, it is especially important to observe the following technical limit values:

• maximum permitted operating pressure of the hydraulics

• maximum permitted drive speed

• maximum permitted total weight

• maximum permitted axle load/axle loads

• maximum permitted drawbar load

• maximum permitted axle loads of the tractor

• maximum permitted transport height and width

• maximum permitted speed

„

Comply with limit values, refer to page 42

.

2.4.10

Danger zones

If the machine is switched on, its surrounding can present a danger zone.

Avoid entering the danger zone of the machine by observing the minimum safety distance.

If the safety distance is not observed, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Do not switch on the drives and engine if the minimum safety distance has not been observed.

„ If people fail to observe the minimum safety distance, switch off the drives.

„ Switch the machine off in shunting and field mode.

The safety distance is:

For machine in shunting operation and field mode

In front of the machine 3 m

Behind the machine 5 m

Laterally to the machine 3 m

For machine switched on without driving motion

In front of the machine 3 m

Behind the machine 5 m

Laterally to the machine 3 m

The safety distances specified here are minimum distances in terms of intended use. If necessary, these safety distances must be increased according to the operating and ambient conditions.

„ Before working in front of and behind the tractor and in the danger zone of the machine:

Shut down and secure the machine, refer to page 27

. This also applies to brief inspection work.

„ Consider the information in all relevant operating instructions:

• the operating instructions of the tractor

• the operating instructions of the machine

• the operating instructions of universal shaft

18

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Danger zone universal shaft

People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the universal shaft.

„ Observe operating instructions of universal shaft.

„ Ensure sufficient overlap of section tube and universal shaft guards.

„ Make sure that the universal shaft guards are mounted and that they are fully functional.

„ Allow the universal shaft locks to engage. There must be no areas of the locking device on the PTO shaft fork which could cause catching or entrapment (e.g. by annular design, protective collar around the locking pin).

„ Attach chains to prevent the universal shaft guards from rotating with the shaft.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

„ Ensure that the selected speed and direction of rotation of the PTO shaft of the tractor match the permitted speed and direction of rotation of the machine.

„ Switch off the PTO shaft when the angles between the universal shaft and the PTO shaft are too large. The machine may be damaged. Parts may be hurled up and cause injury to people.

2

2.4

Danger zone PTO shaft

People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the PTO shaft and the driven components.

Before switching on the PTO shaft:

„ Ensure that all protective devices are mounted and brought into protective position.

„ Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

„ Switch off drives if they are not needed.

Danger zone between tractor and machine

People standing between the tractor and machine may be seriously injured or killed if the tractor rolls away or by carelessness or machine movements:

„ Before carrying out any work between the tractor and the machine: Always turn off and

secure the machine, refer to page 27

. This also applies to brief inspection work.

„ If the lifting device must be actuated, instruct all people to keep away from the range of movement of the lifting device.

Danger zone when drive is switched on

When the drive is switched on, there is a danger to life caused by rotating machine parts.

Ensure that there are no persons in the danger zone of the machine.

„ Before starting the machine, instruct all people to leave the danger zone of the machine.

„ In case of dangerous situations, immediately switch off drives and instruct people to leave the danger zone.

Danger zone due to trailing machine parts

If machine parts are trailing, people may be seriously injured or killed.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 19

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

After the drives have been switched off, the following machine parts will trail:

• Universal shaft

• Drive chains

• Pick-up

• Cutting rotor

• Tying unit

• Bale formation conveyor

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27

.

„ Do not attempt to approach the machine until all moving machine parts have come to a standstill.

2.4.11

Ensuring functionality of safety devices

If safety devices are missing or damaged, people may be seriously injured or killed by moving machine parts.

„ Replace damaged safety devices.

„ Mount dismounted safety devices and machine parts again before start-up and move them to protective position.

„ If it is doubtful whether all safety devices have been correctly installed and are functional, have a service centre check them.

Keeping universal shaft guard functional

The overlap of universal shaft and protective cap on the machine must not be less than 50 mm.

This minimum overlap is also required for protective devices of wide-angle universal shaft and if couplings or other components are used. If the operator has to reach between the universal shaft guard and the protective cap to connect the universal shaft, the clearance on one level must be at least 50 mm. On all levels the clearance must be no more than 150 mm.

2.4.12

Personal protective equipment

The wearing of personal protective equipment is an important safety measure. Missing or unsuitable personal protective equipment increases health risks and injuries.

Personal protective equipment is for example:

• Suitable protective gloves

• Safety boots

• Close fitting protective clothing

• Hearing protection

• Safety glasses

„ Specify and provide personal protective equipment for the particular job.

„ Use only personal protective equipment which is in proper condition and offers effective protection.

„ Adjust personal protective equipment to the person, for example the size.

„ Remove unsuitable clothing and jewellery (e.g. rings, necklaces) and cover long hair with a hairnet.

20

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

2.4.13

2.4.14

Safety

Basic safety instructions

2

2.4

Safety markings on the machine

Safety labels on the machine caution against dangers at danger areas and represent an important part of the safety equipment of the machine. Missing safety labels increase the risk of serious and fatal injuries.

„ Clean dirty safety labels.

„ Make sure every time after cleaning the safety labels that they are complete and legible.

„ Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognizable safety labels.

„ Provide spare parts with intended safety labels.

Descriptions, explanations and order numbers of safety labels, refer to page 29

.

Road safety

Dangers for road travel

If the machine exceeds the maximum dimensions and weights specified by national law and is not correctly lit when travelling on public roads, other road users may be endangered.

„ Before driving on roads, ensure that the maximum permitted dimensions, weights and axle, drawbar and trailer loads are not exceeded which apply to driving on public roads according to national law.

„ Before driving on roads, switch on the road travel lighting and ensure that it functions properly.

„ Before driving on roads, close all stop cocks for the hydraulic supply to the machine between tractor and machine.

„ Before driving on roads, move the tractor control units to the neutral position and lock them.

Danger when driving on road and field

Hitched and mounted machines change the handling characteristics of the tractor. The handling characteristics depend for instance on operating state and ground. If changed handling characteristics are not considered, the driver may cause accidents.

„ Observe measures for driving on road and field,

refer to page 157 .

Dangers if the machine is not prepared properly for road travel

If the machine is not prepared properly for road travel, serious accidents may occur with traffic.

„ Before driving on roads, prepare the machine for road travel,

refer to page 158

.

Danger when cornering with a machine hitched and due to the overall width

Accidents may occur when cornering due to the machine swinging out and also due to the overall width.

„ Consider the overall width of the combined tractor and machine.

„ Consider the larger swivel range when cornering.

„ Adjust the driving speed when cornering.

„ When turning, watch out for people, oncoming traffic and obstacles.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 21

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Dangers when operating the machine on slopes

The machine may tilt when it is used on slopes. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Do not work and drive on a slope unless the ground of the slope is flat and the adhesion of the tyres to the ground is ensured.

„ Turn the machine at low speed. Turn in a large arc.

„ Avoid driving across a slope because the centre of gravity of the machine will be changed by payload and by executing machine functions.

„ Avoid abrupt steering movements on slopes.

„ On slopes always deposit a round bale in such a way that it cannot move on its own.

„ Do not park the machine on slopes.

2.4.15

2.4.16

Parking the machine safely

An incorrectly parked and insufficiently safeguarded machine can represent a danger for people, especially children, and can be set into motion or fall over in an uncontrolled manner.

People may be injured or killed.

„ Park the machine on a horizontal and level ground capable of bearing the load.

„ Before adjusting, repairing, servicing and cleaning the machine, ensure that it is securely positioned.

„ Observe section “Parking the Machine” in chapter Driving and Transport.

refer to page 158

„ Before parking: Shut down and safeguard the machine,

refer to page 27 .

Consumables

2.4.17

Unsuitable consumables

Consumables which do not comply with the requirements of the manufacturer may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.

„ Use only consumables which comply with the requirements of the manufacturer.

For requirements on consumables, refer to page 44 .

Environmental protection and disposal

Consumables such as diesel fuel, brake fluid, antifreeze and lubricants (e.g. gearbox oil, hydraulic oil) may damage the environment and the health of people.

„ Do not release consumables into the environment.

„ Fill consumables in a liquid-tight labelled container and dispose of according to the official regulations.

„ Absorb leaked consumables with an absorbent material, fill them in a liquid-tight labelled container and dispose of according to the official regulations.

Dangers arising from environment

Fire hazard

Combustible materials may accumulate in the machine due to operation or animals, such as rodents or nesting birds, or dust resuspension.

22

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Safety

Basic safety instructions

In case of dry usage conditions, dust, impurities and crop residue may ignite on hot parts and the resulting fire may seriously injure or kill people.

„ Check and clean the machine every day before using it for the first time.

„ Check and clean the machine regularly during the working day.

2

2.4

Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines

With tailgate open, the machine may reach the height of overhead lines. This may cause voltage to flash over to the machine and cause a fatal electric shock or fire.

„ Keep a safe distance from electric overhead lines when opening the tailgate.

„ Never open the tailgate near pylons and overhead lines.

„ Keep a safe distance from electric overhead lines when the tailgate is open.

„ To avoid a potential electric shock caused by a voltage flashover, never exit from or climb into the tractor under overhead lines.

Behavior in the case of voltage flashover of overhead lines

High electric voltage may be applied to electrically conducting parts of the machine due to voltage flashover. In case of voltage flashover, a voltage drop where major voltage differences are present is created on the ground around the machine. Due to major voltage differences in the ground, people may be killed by electric shocks when making big steps, laying on the ground or supporting themselves with their hands.

„ Do not leave the cabin.

„ Do not touch any metal parts.

„ Do not establish any conductive connection to the ground.

„ Warn people: Do not approach the machine. Electrical voltage differences on the ground may lead to severe electric shocks.

„ Wait for help from professional rescue teams. The overhead line must be switched off.

If people have to leave the cabin despite the voltage flashover, for example because there is an imminent danger to life due to fire:

„ Avoid simultaneous contact with machine and ground.

„ Jump away from the machine. Jump into a safe standing position. Do not touch the machine from the outside.

„ Move away from the machine in very small steps keeping your feet close together.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 23

2

2.4

2.4.18

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Sources of danger on the machine

Noise may damage your health

The noise development of the machine during operation may cause health damage such as hardness of hearing, deafness or tinnitus. When using the machine at high rotational speed, the noise level also increases. The height of the sound pressure level depends mainly on the tractor used. The emissions value was measured with the cabin closed under conditions according to

DIN EN ISO 4254-1, Appendix B, refer to page 42

.

„ Before starting up the machine, estimate the risk caused by noise.

„ Depending on the ambient conditions, working hours and the working and operating conditions of the machine, specify and use suitable hearing protection.

„ Specify rules for the use of hearing protection and for the working time.

„ During operation keep windows and doors of the cabin closed.

„ Remove hearing protection for road travel.

Liquids under high pressure

The following liquids are under high pressure:

• Hydraulic oil

Liquids escaping under high pressure may penetrate through the skin and cause severe injuries.

„ Shut down and safeguard the machine and contact qualified specialist workshop upon suspicion of damaged hydraulic system.

„ Never search for leaks with bare hands. Even a very pin-sized hole may lead to serious injuries.

„ When searching for leaks, use suitable aids, e.g. a piece of cardboard to avoid injuries.

„ Keep body and face away from leaks.

„ If liquids penetrate the body, immediately consult a doctor. The liquid must be removed from the body as quickly as possible.

Hot liquids

If hot liquids are drained, people may burn and/or scald themselves.

„ When draining hot consumables, wear personal protective equipment.

„ Before performing any repair, maintenance or cleaning work, allow liquids and machine parts to cool off, if necessary.

Damaged compressor unit

Damaged compressed air hoses of compressor unit may tear off. Hoses that move uncontrollably may hurt people seriously.

„ If it is suspected that the compressor unit is damaged, immediately contact a specialist workshop.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

24

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

2.4.19

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Damaged hydraulic hoses

Damaged hydraulic hoses may tear off, burst or cause oil leaks. As a result, the machine may be damaged and people may be seriously injured.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27

.

„ If it is suspected that hydraulic hoses are damaged, immediately contact a service centre,

refer to page 194

.

2

2.4

Hot surfaces

The following components may become hot during operation and may burn people:

• Bale chamber

• Magnetic coils of the regulating valves

• Gearbox

„ Maintain an adequate distance from hot surfaces and adjacent components.

„ Leave machine parts to cool down and wear protective gloves.

Dangers in connection with certain activities: Working on the machine

Only perform work when the machine is at standstill

If the machine is not shut down and safeguarded, parts may move unintentionally or the machine may start moving. Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Before carrying out any repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the machine, shutdown and safeguard it,

refer to page 27 .

Maintenance and repair work

Improper maintenance and repair work endanger operational safety. Thus there is a risk of accidents, serious injuries or death.

„ Only perform work which is described in this operating instructions. Prior to any work, stop

and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ All other maintenance and repair work must only be performed by qualified specialist workshop.

Working at or on heights of the machine

There is a risk of falling when working at or on heights of the machine. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„

Prior to any work, stop and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27

.

„ Make sure you stand securely.

„ Use a suitable fall protection.

„ Secure the area below the assembly point against falling objects.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 25

2

2.4

Safety

Basic safety instructions

Raised machine and machine parts

The raised machine and machine parts may fall or tilt unintentionally. People may be seriously injured or killed, as a result.

„

Do not stay under the raised machine or machine parts which are not safely supported, refer to page 27 .

„ Prior to all work on raised machines or machine parts, lower the machine or machine parts.

„ Before performing any work under raised machines or machine parts, secure the machine or machine parts with rigid safety support or with hydraulic shut-off device or by supporting against lowering.

Danger associated with welding work

Improper welding work will endanger the operational safety of the machine. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Never perform welding work on the following components:

• Gearbox

• Components of the hydraulics

• Components of the electronics

• Frame or supporting components

• Running gear

„ Before carrying out welding work on the machine, obtain consent by KRONE customer service and, if required, identify alternatives.

„ Before performing welding work on the machine, park the machine safely and disconnect it from the tractor.

„ Welding work must only be performed by experienced qualified personnel.

„ Attach the earthing of the welding device near the welding points.

„ Caution when performing welding work near electric and hydraulic parts, plastic parts and pressure accumulators. The parts may be damaged, endanger people or cause accidents.

2.4.20

Dangers in connection with certain activities: working on wheels and tyres

Improper assembly or disassembly of wheels and tyres will endanger the operational safety. As a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.

The fitting of wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and approved mounting tools.

„ If there is a lack of knowledge, have the wheels and tyres fitted by the KRONE dealer or by a qualified tyre service.

„ When fitting tyres on the rims, never exceed the maximum permitted pressure specified by

KRONE, otherwise the tyre or even the rim may explode,

refer to page 42 .

„

When mounting the wheels, mount the wheel nuts with the specified tightening torque, refer to page 191

.

26

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

2.4.21

Safety

Safety routines

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of accidents

Any measures not taken or incorrect measures in dangerous situations can make it difficult or impossible to rescue exposed persons. Due to the impeded conditions of rescue, the chances to help and heal injured people deteriorate.

„ As a matter of principle: Park the machine.

„ Get an overview of the existing danger and identify the reason.

„ Secure the accident site.

„ Save persons from the danger zone.

„ Leave danger zone and do not enter it again.

„ Alarm rescue workers and seek help, if possible.

„ Carry out immediate lifesaving actions.

2

2.5

Safety routines 2.5

2.5.1

2.5.2

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts

If the machine has not been shut down, machine or machine parts may move unintentionally.

As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Before leaving the operating position: Shut down and safeguard the machine.

To shut down and safeguard the machine:

„ Park the machine on a stable, horizontal and level ground.

„ Switch off the drives and wait until coasting parts have come to a complete stop.

„ Switch off the tractor engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Secure the tractor against rolling away.

„ Secure the machine against rolling away by using wheel chocks.

„ If fitted, apply the parking brake on the machine.

Securing raised machine and machine parts against lowering

WARNING

Crushing hazard due to movement of machine or machine parts

If the machine or machine parts are not secured against lowering, the machine or machine parts may roll, fall or sag. Thus people could be squeezed or killed.

„ Lower the raised machine parts.

„ Shut down and safeguard the machine,

refer to page 27 .

„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Secure machine or machine parts against lowering by means of hydraulic shut-off device (e.g. stop cock) on machine side.

„ Before working on or under raised machine parts: Safely support machine or machine parts.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 27

2

2.5

Safety

Safety routines

In order to safely support the machine or machine parts:

„ To support, only use suitable and sufficiently dimensioned materials that do not break or yield.

„ Bricks and hollow blocks are not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine parts. Therefore they must not be used.

„ Car jacks are also not suitable for safely supporting the machine and machine parts. They must not be used, as well.

2.5.3

2.5.4

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely

WARNING

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely

If oil level check and oil and filter element changes are not carried out safely, the operational safety of the machine may be impaired. This may result in accidents.

„ Carry out oil level check and oil and filter element changes safely.

To carry out oil level check, oil and filter element changes safely:

„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling,

refer to page 27 .

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Observe the intervals for oil level check, oil and filter element changes,

refer to page 182 .

„ Use only the oil grades and quantities specified in the consumables table,

refer to page 44 .

„ Clean the area around the parts (for example gearbox, high-pressure filter) and make sure that no foreign objects get into the parts or the hydraulic system.

„ Check existing seal rings for damage and replace them, if necessary.

„ Collect leaking or waste oil in a container designated for the purpose and dispose of it

properly, refer to page 22

.

Running actuator test

WARNING

Run actuator test safely

When actuators are energised, functions are carried out directly and without a safety prompt.

This may cause the unintentional movement of machine parts, trapping and seriously or fatally injuring persons.

ü Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

ü The person performing the test must know which machine parts are activated by controlling the actuators.

„ Run the actuator test safely.

To run the actuator test safely:

„ Lower raised machine parts or secure them against falling,

refer to page 27 .

„

Shut down and secure the machine, refer to page 27

.

„ Cordon off the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts in a clearly visible manner.

28

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

„ Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of the actuated moving machine parts.

„ Switch on the ignition.

„ The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.

2

2.6

Safety labels on the machine

Every safety label is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the authorised KRONE dealer. Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety labels.

When attaching safety labels, the contact surface on the machine must be clean and free of dirt, oil and grease to ensure optimum adhesion of the labels.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 29

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

Position and meaning of safety labels

5 2 5

1

3

8

6

11

12

9 10 4 3 3 7

6

3

3 8 7

3 13

14

8

10

4

8

3

RPG000-064

30

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

1.

Ord. no. 939 471 1 (1x)

Danger due to incorrect operation and lack of knowledge

Incorrect operation and lack of knowledge of the machine as well as incorrect behaviour in hazardous situations is risking the life of the operator and third parties.

„ Before starting up the machine, read and follow the operating instructions and safety instructions.

2.

Ord. no. 939 100 4 (1x)

Danger when exceeding the maximum permissible PTO speed or the maximum permissible operating pressure

When exceeding the permissible PTO speed, machine parts may be destroyed or ejected.

If the maximum permissible operating pressure is exceeded, hydraulic parts may be damaged.

As a result, people may be seriously or fatally injured.

„ Observe the permissible PTO speed.

„ Observe the permitted operating pressure.

3.

Order no. 942 196 1 (6x, for version with "Hydraulic support jack": 7x)

Danger due to crushing or shearing

Risk of injury due to crushing or shearing points on moving machine parts.

„ While parts are moving, never reach into areas where there is a risk of being crushed.

4.

Ord. no. 939 407 1 (2x)

Danger due to rotating pick-up

There is a danger of being drawn in if you approach the danger zone and if you use your hands or feet to remove crop blockages.

„ Before working on the pick-up, switch off the PTO shaft and the engine.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 31

2

2.6

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

5.

Ord. no. 939 125 1 (2x)

Danger from sharp blades.

There is danger of being cut when reaching into the danger zone of the blades

„ Wear cut-resistant protective gloves.

6.

Ord. no. 27 014 576 0 (4x)

Danger due to impact or crushing

There is danger to life due to the tailgate lowering.

„ Before carrying out any maintenance work in the area of the tailgate, close the stop cock on the left lifting cylinder.

„ Ensure that there is no one under the raised tailgate.

7.

Ord. no. 939 520 1 (2x)

Danger due to rotating auger

There is a risk of being pulled in or caught by the rotating auger.

„ Never reach into the rotating auger.

„ Maintain an adequate distance from moving machine parts.

8.

Ord. no. 942 002 4 (4x)

9.

Ord. no. 942 360 4 (1x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When the machine is running, there is a risk of injury due to rotating machine parts.

„ Before starting up, move the guards into their protective position.

Danger due to unintended movement of the machine when opening the tailgate

Risk of injury due to the machine rolling away or overturning.

„ Before opening the tailgate, ensure that the machine has been correctly coupled to the tractor.

„ When uncoupling the machine, ensure that the tailgate is closed.

32

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Safety

Safety labels on the machine

2

2.6

10. Ord. no. 939 408 2 (2x)

Danger due to rotating machine parts

When climbing onto the machine while the PTO shaft is running, there is a risk of being pulled in by rotating machine parts.

„ Before climbing onto the machine, switch off the PTO shaft and the engine.

11. Ord. no. 27 013 422 0 (2x)

Danger due to impact

Risk of injury from the rolling bale.

„ Ensure that no one remains in the danger zone.

12. Ord. no. 939 412 2 (2x)

Danger due to impact or crushing

When opening the tailgate, there is a risk of people being crushed in the danger zone between the tailgate and a fixed obstacle.

„ Ensure that there is nobody between the tailgate and a fixed obstacle.

13. Ord. no. 27 014 439 0 (1x)

Danger due to impact

Risk of injury due to lever under spring tension.

„ When actuating the lever, maintain an adequate distance.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 33

2

2.7

Safety

Safety equipment

14. Ord. no. 939 529 0 (2x)

Danger due to high-pressure liquid

The pressure accumulator is under gas and oil pressure.

There is a risk of injury if the pressure accumulator is not removed or repaired properly.

„ Observe the notices in the operating instructions before removing and repairing the pressure accumulator.

„ The pressure accumulator may only be removed and repaired by a specialist workshop.

2.7

Safety equipment

6

1

2

4

3.1

5 3.2

7

RPG000-067

34

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Safety

Safety equipment

2

2.7

Pos.

1

Designation Explanation

Parking brake (country-specific) • The parking brake is used to secure the machine from unintentionally rolling away,

refer to page 76

.

• The additional safety cable applies the parking brake if the machine breaks away from the

tractor while it is driving, refer to page 77

.

• In order to prevent the machine from rolling

away, also use the wheel chocks, refer to page 77

.

2 (depending on country version)

Safety chain • The safety chain is used for the additional protection of trailed machines in case they

become unhitched during transport, refer to page 67

.

• The country-specific regulations for using the safety chain during transportation of the machine must be observed.

3.1

Catch loop

Overload protection universal shaft

• The catch loop is used for the additional protection of hitched machines.

• The overload protection guards the tractor and

the machine from load peaks, refer to page 38

.

3.2

Pick-up overload protection

4

5

6 (depending on country version)

7

Wheel chocks

Support jack

SMV emblem

Stop cock tailgate

• The overload protection guards the tractor and

the machine from load peaks, refer to page 38

.

• The wheel chocks secure the machine against rolling away. 2 wheel chocks are affixed to the

machine, refer to page 77

.

• For version with "Parking brake": In order to prevent the machine from rolling away, use the parking brake in addition to the wheel chocks,

refer to page 76

.

• The support jack is used to keep the machine stable when it is not connected to the tractor,

refer to page 73

.

• The Slow-Moving Vehicle emblem may be attached to slow-moving machines or vehicles,

refer to page 36

. The country-specific specifications must be observed.

• The SMV emblem is at the rear in the centre or on the left.

• If the machine is transported on transport vehicles (e.g. lorry or train), the SMV emblem must be covered or removed.

• The tailgate stop cock is a safety component which prevents the tailgate from unintentionally

closing, refer to page 76

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 35

2

2.7

2.7.1

Safety

Safety equipment

SMV emblem

For the version with “SMV emblem”

KM000-567

The SMV emblem (Slow-Moving Vehicle) (1) can be mounted on slow-moving machines or vehicles. The country-specific specifications must be observed.

The SMV emblem (1) is at the rear in the centre or on left.

If the machine is transported on transport vehicles (for example lorry or train), the SMV emblem must be covered or dismounted.

36

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

3

Data memory 3

Data memory

A variety of electronic components of the machine contains data memories which save temporarily and permanently technical information on machine condition, events and errors.

This technical information generally documents the condition of a part, module, system or of the environment:

• Operating states of system components (e.g. filling levels)

• Status messages of the machine and its single components (e.g. number of revolutions of wheel, wheel speed, motion delay, lateral acceleration)

• Malfunctions and defects in important system components (e.g. light and brakes)

• Reactions of machine in special driving situations (e.g. actuation of airbag, installing stability control systems)

• Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature)

These data are exclusively of a technical nature. They are used to detect and remedy errors as well as to optimize machine functions. There is no possibility to create motion profiles on driven routes from these data.

If services are used (e.g. repair services, service processes, warranty cases, quality assurance), this technical information can be read out by employees of service network (including manufacturer) from the event and error data memories by means of special diagnostic units.

There you receive further information, if necessary. After the error has been remedied, the information in the error storage is either deleted or continuously overwritten.

When using the machine, situations are possible in which these technical data in connection with other information (accident protocol, damage to the machine, testimonies etc.) could become transferable to people - if applicable in consultation with an expert.

Additional functions regulated by a contractual agreement with the customer (e.g. remote maintenance) permit the transmission of certain machine data from the machine.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 37

4

4.1

4

Machine description

Machine overview

Machine description

4.1

Machine overview

1 2 3 4

5

6

4.2

38

18 17 15 16 14

RPG000-069

1 Hose and cable support

2 Wrapping material brake

3 Wrapping material

4 Storage compartment

5 Road travel lighting

6 Bale ejector

7 Document storage tube

8 Blade cassette

9 Cutting rotor

13 12 11 10 9 8 7

10 Guide wheel

11 Pick-up

12 Crop press roller unit

13 Wheel chocks

14 Support jack

15 Drawbar

16 Universal shaft

17 Catch loop

18 Drawbar eye

Overload protections on the machine

NOTICE

Machine damage due to load peaks

The overload protections protect the tractor and the machine from load peaks. For this reason, overload protections must not be modified. The warranty for the machine becomes void if other than the factory-specified overload protections are used.

„ Only use the overload protections installed in the machine.

„ To avoid early wear of the overload protection, switch the PTO shaft off if the overload protection responds for a longer period of time.

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Remedy the malfunction,

refer to page 224 .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

4.3

Machine description

Identification plate

Universal shaft

To prevent an overload, there is a cam clutch on the universal shaft.

4

4.3

Pick-up drive

To prevent an overload, there is a cam clutch on the pick-up drive. This cam clutch has been set at the factory and must not be adjusted without consulting your KRONE service partner.

Pick-up drive

To prevent an overload, there is a claw coupling on the pick-up drive. This claw coupling has been set at the factory and must not be adjusted without consulting your KRONE service partner.

Identification plate

INFORMATION

The entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered or rendered illegible!

1

RPG000-007

The machine data are specified on a type plate (1). This is located on the right side of the machine in the storage compartment.

Information for enquiries and orders

If you have any further queries on the machine or if you want to order spare parts, always enter type designation, vehicle identification number and year of manufacture of the corresponding machine. To ensure that these data are always available, we recommend to enter them in the fields on the front cover page of these operating instructions.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 39

4

4.4

4.4

Machine description

Function description net wrapping

Function description net wrapping

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

10

8

9

13

11 12

14 15 16 17

RP000-533

1 Deflection shaft

2 Spring of the wrapping material brake

3 Spreading bracket

4 Spreading roller

5 Retaining sheet

6 Synthetic cloth

7 Path of net

8 Cutting unit

9 Retaining bracket

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Wrapping material brake

Tension lever

Feed rocker arm

Plastic guide

Deflection roll on the cross tube

Deflection tube on the cross tube

Cross tube

Feed roller

When tying is started, the feed rocker arm (12) guides the net onto the feed roller (16). The feed roller (16) guides the net between the compression rollers to the round bale and pulls it off the round bale. When the tying cycle of the set number of net layers is complete, the cutting unit (8) swings over the net and cuts the net.

40

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

4.5

Machine description

Function description net and chamber film wrapping

Function description net and chamber film wrapping

4

4.5

1 2 3 4 5 6

4.6

7

9

8

10

11

18

17

16

15

13

14 12

RP000-181

1 Net or film roll

2 Deflection roll

3 Pressure axis with foam wadding

4 Conical roller

5 Spreading roll

6 Synthetic cloth

7 Retaining sheet

8 Feed strips

10 Cutting unit

11 Compression rollers

12 Feed roller

13 Feed unit

14 Spreading bracket

15 Deflection roll on the cross tube

16 Feed rocker arm

17 Spherical button for locking the tension lever

18 Tension lever 9 Wrapping material path of net or film

When tying is started, the feed rocker arm (16) guides the wrapping material (net or film) via the feed unit (13) onto the feed roller (12). The feed roller (12) guides the wrapping material (net or film) between the compression rollers (11) to the round bale and pulls it off the round bale.

When the tying cycle of the set number of net or film layers is complete, the cutting unit (10) swings over the wrapping material (net or film) and cuts the wrapping material (net or film).

Function description cutting unit

The machine has a cutting unit with cutting rotor and fixed blades. Cutting helps to improve further processing of the round bales and to increase baling density. From the tractor, the blade cassette can be swivelled hydraulically out of the feed channel if there are any crop blockages,

refer to page 84 . The single blade locking device prevents the blades from being damaged by

foreign objects. The cutting unit can also be switched off mechanically.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 41

5 Technical data

5 Technical data

Dimensions

Width (15.0/55-17, single axle braked)

Width (15.0/55.17, single axle unbraked)

Width (15.0/55-17 tandem axle)

Width (500/50-17, single axle braked)

Width (500/50-17, single axle unbraked)

Width (500/50-17 tandem axle)

Width (500/55-20 single axle braked)

Width (500/55-20 single axle non-braked)

Width (500/55-20 tandem axle)

Height (with standard tyres)

Length

Length (with bale ejector)

2,620 mm

2,535 mm

2840 mm

2,770 mm

2,650 mm

2,900 mm

2715 mm

2665 mm

2970 mm

2,990 mm

5,145 mm

5,600 mm

Weights

Weights see information on the type

plate refer to page 39

Track width

Track width

Pick-up

Pick-up width 2,150/2,200 mm

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel) 1

Technically permitted maximum speed (road travel) 40 km/h

1 The technically permitted maximum speed may be restricted by different equipment features

(e.g. coupling device, axle, brake, tyres, etc.) or by statutory regulations in the country of use.

Round bales

Size of round bales (diameter)

Size of round bales (width)

ø 1,000-1,500 mm

1,200 mm

Net wrapping

Net max. width

Net sleeve length

Net sleeve diameter

Net roll diameter

Chamber film wrapping

Film max. width

Film sleeve length

Film sleeve diameter chamber film wrapping

Film roll diameter chamber film wrapping

2,200/2,400 mm

1,300 mm

1,250-1,330 mm

ø 75-80 mm

ø max. 310 mm

1,280 mm

1,295 mm

ø 77,3 mm

ø 225 mm (2,000 m roll)

42

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Technical data 5

Minimum requirements for the tractor

Power requirement

Drive speed (PTO shaft)

Operating pressure of hydraulic system (max.)

Max. oil temperature

Minimum oil quality

Delivery capacity hydraulics (min.)

Delivery capacity hydraulics (max.)

Electrical connections

Electr. connection for road travel lighting (7-pole plug)

Electr. connection for operation (ISOBUS socket)

36 kW (50 HP)

540 rpm

200 bar

80 °C

Oil ISO VG 46

30 L/min

60 L/min

12 volts available

Necessary hydraulic connections at the tractor

Hydraulic connection (T)/depressurised return in the tank

Single-acting hydraulic connection

For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system"

Double-acting hydraulic connection

For version with "Hydraulic support jack"

Double-acting hydraulic connection

1 x

2 x

1 x

1 x

Tyre designation Minimum pressure

V max

=10 km/h

Guide wheels on the pick-up

16x6.50-8

Tyres on the machine

15.0/55-17

500/50-17

500/55-20

1.3 bar

1.0 bar

1.0 bar

Maximum pressure

5.0 bar

3.6 bar

2.8 bar

3.0 bar

Recommended tyre pressure

Single axle

2.6 bar

2.0 bar

1.5 bar

1

Tandem axle

1.5 bar

1.5 bar

1.5 bar

1 This recommendation applies especially to the typical mixture of operation (field/road) at the maximum permitted machine speed. If required, the tyre pressure can be reduced to the indicated minimum air pressure. However, the associated maximum speed must then be observed.

Airborne noise emission

Emissions value (sound pressure level)

Measurement device

Accuracy class

72.8 dB

Bruel & Kjaer, Type 2236

2

Measurement uncertainty (according to DIN EN ISO 11201) 4 dB

Ambient temperature

Temperature range for machine operation -5 to +45 °C

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 43

5

5.1

5.1

Technical data

Consumables

Consumables

NOTICE

Complying with change intervals for biooils

To ensure high life expectancy of the machine, it is absolutely necessary to comply with change intervals for biooils due to the ageing of the oils.

NOTICE

Machine damage due to mixing of oil

If oils, which have different specifications, are mixed with each other, the machine may be damaged.

„ Never mix oils, which have different specifications, with each other.

„ Contact your KRONE service partner before using an oil with a different specification after changing the oil.

Biodegradable consumables can be used on request.

5.1.1

Oils

Designation

T-gearbox main drive

Central chain lubrication unit

Filling quantity

2.00 L

7.00 L

Specification

SAE 90

SAE 10W-40

5.1.2

Lubricating greases

Designation

Central lubrication unit

Lubrication points (manual lubrication)

Filling quantity Specification

1.4 L

The filling quantity is as required. Lubricate the lubrication points until lubricating grease comes out of the bearing position. After lubricating, remove the grease coming out of the bearing position.

Lubricating grease acc. to DIN

51818 of NLGI class 2, Li soap with EP additives

44

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

6

6.1

Initial operation

Scope of delivery

Initial operation

This chapter describes assembly and adjustment work on the machine which may be carried out by qualified technicians only. Here, the notice “Personnel qualification of technicians” applies,

refer to page 16 .

6

6.1

WARNING

Risk of injury or damage to the machine due to faulty initial operation

If the initial operation is carried out incorrectly or incompletely, the machine may present defects. As a result, people may be injured or killed or the machine may be damaged.

„ Initial operation must only be carried out by authorised technicians.

„ Read in full and observe the “Personnel qualification of technicians”,

refer to page 16

.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, refer to page 15 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 27

.

Scope of delivery

The machine is delivered with the following additional parts which are in the storage compartment, under the machine or on the pick-up.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 45

6

6.1

Initial operation

Scope of delivery

2 4 6

12.1

12

1

12.2

3 5

7

8

9

12.3

12.4

12.5

10

11

12.7

12.8

12.6

RPG000-056

1 Universal shaft

2 Ring spanner

3 Terminal (depending on version)

4 Small parts

5 7-pole connection cable for road travel lighting

6 Hose and cable support

7 Can of spray paint

8 Warning foil

9 Test roll KRONE excellent, net for net wrapping

10 Universal shaft bracket

11 Key for the mechanical blade group control system

12 Bale ejector components

12.1 Bale ejector

12.2 Linkage

12.3 Eye bolts

12.4 Springs

12.5 Strips

12.6 Screws

12.7 Springs with clamping screws

12.8 Nuts

46

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

6.2

6.3

Initial operation

Mounting hose and cable support

6

6.2

Mounting hose and cable support

3

1

1

4

3

2

RPG000-010

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Take the hose and cable support (1) out of the storage compartment.

„ Place the hose and cable support (1) as shown with the support (3) on the frame tube (4).

„ Mount the hose and cable support (1) with the screw connections (2).

Preparing the brake disc of the wrapping material brake

6.4

RPG000-011

„ Remove the duct tape (1) provided as corrosion protection from the surface of the brake disc (2) and discard.

Checking/adapting the tyre pressure

Before the initial operation, check and adjust the tyre pressure. A label at the PTO shaft end draws the attention to this important test:

RP000-060

„ Checking and adjusting the tyre pressure,

refer to page 191

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 47

6

6.5

6.5

Initial operation

Adjusting the drawbar height

Adjusting the drawbar height

NOTICE

When the tractor and machine are in a horizontal position, the hitched mechanical connection devices (e.g. ball-head hitch) must be in a horizontal position (+/- 3°) with respect to the ground so as not to obstruct the operational swivel angle between the mechanical connection devices.

To ensure that the pick-up evenly picks up the crops, the drawbar height of the machine must be adjusted to the tractor used.

48

X

RPG000-058

The height of the drawbar is ideally set if, when the machine is coupled to the tractor, dimension

X between the middle of the cutting or feed rotor and the ground is X=700-750 mm .

With straw (large swaths), the dimension may deviate: X=750-800 mm.

Machines with tyres 15.0/55-17 in combination with a tandem axle: X=680 mm

Checking drawbar height

ü

The tyre pressure matches the value in the tyre table, refer to page 43

.

„ To ensure optimum operating conditions, hitch the machine so that the dimension X matches the aforementioned values.

ð If the measured dimension differs from dimension X, adjust the drawbar height as follows.

Adjusting the drawbar height

2

1

3

RPG000-087

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Initial operation

Universal shaft

ü The machine is disconnected from the tractor and stands on the support jack.

„ Loosen the screw connections (1) on the right and left sides of the drawbar until the drawbar (3) can be moved in the toothed disc connections (2).

„ Adjust the drawbar (3) to the height of the tractor hitch.

„ Ensure that the toothed disc connections (2) mesh.

6

6.6

4

5

6

5

6.6

6.6.1

RPG000-136

To adjust the height of the drawbar eye (6):

„ Loosen the screw connections (5) until the drawbar (6) can be moved in the toothed disc connections (5).

„ Align the drawbar eye (6) parallel to the ground.

„ Ensure that the toothed disc connections (5) mesh.

„ Tighten the screw connections (1) and (5). Torque,

refer to page 188

.

„ After 10 operating hours tighten the screw connections (1) and (5).

Universal shaft

Adjusting the length of the universal shaft

NOTICE

Changing the tractor

The machine could be damaged if the universal shaft length is not checked when changing the tractor.

„ In order to avoid damage to the machine, check universal shaft length every time the

tractor is changed and correct it, if necessary, refer to page 49

.

1

RPG000-086

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 49

6

6.6

Initial operation

Universal shaft

The universal shaft (1) must be shortened as far as allowed by the narrowest position of both universal shaft halves.

6.6.2

To move the machine into the shortest position:

„ Turn the steering of the tractor all the way to the left or to the right and move tractor and machine forwards until the narrowest position is reached when driving around curves.

„ Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key and carry it with you.

„ Secure machine and tractor against rolling away.

„ Instructions on how to shorten the universal shaft (1) can be found in the operating instructions of the universal shaft manufacturer.

Mounting universal shaft bracket

1

3 4

2

RPG000-133

The universal shaft bracket (1) is only required if the drawbar is in the bottom hitching.

The universal shaft bracket (1) is required to support the universal shaft when the machine has been uncoupled from the tractor.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The universal shaft chain (4) and the chain holder have been removed.

„ Take the universal shaft bracket (1) out of the storage compartment.

„ To mount the universal shaft bracket (1), remove the screw connection (3).

„ Clamp the ends of the bolt (2) on both sides in the boreholes in the drawbar beams.

NOTICE! These are the boreholes of the universal shaft chain which was removed beforehand.

„

Mount the screw connection (3). Torque: refer to page 188 .

Æ The universal shaft can be deposited with the bottom hitching of the drawbar on the universal shaft bracket (1),

refer to page 158

.

50

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Initial operation

Mounting the bale ejector

6

6.7

6.6.3

Mounting the universal shaft on the machine

2 3 4

6.7

4

1

5

3

RP000-910

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Mount the universal shaft (3) with the screw connections (1) on the machine. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the universal shaft for the tightening torque.

„ Push the full guard (5) onto the support (2) and lock into place.

„ Also lock the full guard (5) in place using the clips (4).

INFORMATION

For more details or in case of different universal shafts, refer to the operating instructions for the universal shaft comprised in the delivery.

Mounting the bale ejector

For "Single axle" version For "Tandem axle" version

1 1

2 2

RP000-494

ü The tailgate is opened and secured,

refer to page 76

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Undo the screw connections (1) on the mounting plates (2) on the right and left side, but do not remove.

„ Fold the mounting plates (3) outwards.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 51

6

6.7

Initial operation

Mounting the bale ejector

1

2

6

3

5 4

RPG000-119

„ Slide the bale ejector (2) between the holding sheets (6), inserting the bolts (5) into the lower boreholes on the holding sheets (6) on the right and left side of the bale ejector (2).

„ Secure the bolts (5) on the right and left sides of the bale ejector (2) with a disc (4) and clamping sleeve (3).

„ Tighten the screw connections (1) of the holding sheets on the right and left sides of the bale ejector (2).

2

1

6

7

3

4

5

8

52

RP000-496

To mount the strip (1) on the right and left side of the bale ejector:

„ Fit a screw (6), disc (7) and locknut (8).

„ Make sure that the screw (6) is not secured too tightly. The screw (6) must be flush with the locknut (8).

„ Fit a screw (2), springs (3), disc (4) and locknut (5).

„ Place the bale ejector on the machine.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Initial operation

Mounting the bale ejector

6

6.7

2 3

4

1

1

5

6

1

7

RPG000-098

„ Push the linkage (1) on the right and left onto the stud bolt (7) on the frame and secure with a disc (5) and clamping sleeve (6).

„ Push the linkage (1) on the right and left onto the stud bolt (2) of the tailgate and secure with a disc (3) and clamping sleeve (4).

1

2

3

4 5

RP000-498

„ Hook the tension spring (2) into the link (1) on the mounting plate.

„ Hook the eye bolt (3) into the tension spring (2) and guide it through the bore hole (5).

„ Secure with the disc and nut (4).

„ Tighten the nut (4) until the bale ejector swings safely into the basic setting after depositing the round bale.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 53

6

6.7

Initial operation

Mounting the bale ejector

For "Single axle" version

1

RP000-501

The under side of the bale ejector is shown.

„ Mount 2 support sheets (1) with screws and washers on the under side of the bale ejector.

54

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

7

7.1

Commissioning

Connecting machine to tractor

7

7.1

Commissioning

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, refer to page 15 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 27

.

WARNING

Risk of injury or damage to the machine due to connection lines which have been incorrectly connected, interchanged or improperly installed

If the connection lines of the machine have been incorrectly connected to the tractor or have been improperly installed, they may pull off or be damaged. This may result in serious accidents. If connection lines are interchanged, functions may inadvertently be actuated which may also result in serious accidents.

„ Correctly connect and secure the hoses and cables.

„ Lay the hoses, cables and ropes so that they do not scrape, come under tension or become jammed or come into contact with other components (e.g. tractor tyres).

„ Couple and connect the hoses and cables to the designated connections as described in the operating instructions.

Connecting machine to tractor

NOTICE

When the tractor and machine are in a horizontal position, the hitched mechanical connection devices (e.g. ball-head hitch) must be in a horizontal position (+/- 3°) with respect to the ground so as not to obstruct the operational swivel angle between the mechanical connection devices.

1

RP000-098

Example image

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 55

7

7.2

Commissioning

Mounting the universal shaft on the tractor

For version with "Drawbar eye"

WARNING! Increased risk of injury!

Ensure that there is no one between the tractor and the machine while connecting the machine (especially while driving the tractor backwards).

„ Reverse the tractor onto the drawbar until the drawbar eye of the machine has been inserted into the hitching device of the tractor.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Secure the hitching device according to the operating instructions of the tractor manufacturer.

For version with "Ball drawbar eye"

WARNING! Increased risk of injury!

Ensure that there is no one between the tractor and the machine while connecting the machine (especially while driving the tractor backwards).

„ Drive the tractor backwards onto the drawbar and move the ball-head hitch of the tractor under the ball-head attachment of the machine.

„ For version with "Mechanical support jack": Lower the drawbar using the support jack until the ball drawbar eye is positioned on the ball-head attachment.

„ For version with "Hydraulic support jack": Actuate the double-acting control unit (green,

5+) to lower the drawbar using the support jack until the ball drawbar eye is positioned on the ball-head attachment.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Secure the hitching device according to the operating instructions of the tractor manufacturer.

7.2

Mounting the universal shaft on the tractor

WARNING

Risk of injury by failure to take account of the danger zone of the universal shaft

If the danger zone of the universal shaft is ignored, persons can be seriously hurt or killed.

„ To avoid accidents, observe the danger zone of the universal shaft,

refer to page 19 .

NOTICE

Changing the tractor

The machine could be damaged if the universal shaft length is not checked when changing the tractor.

„ In order to avoid damage to the machine, check universal shaft length every time the

tractor is changed and correct it, if necessary, refer to page 49

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

56

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Commissioning

Connecting hydraulic hoses

7

7.3

1

7.3

RPG000-096

„ Push the universal shaft (1) onto the tractor PTO shaft and secure against turning by attaching the supporting chain in a suitable location.

Connecting hydraulic hoses

WARNING

Risk of injury from escaping hydraulic oil

The hydraulic system operates at very high pressure. Escaping hydraulic oil may seriously injure skin, limbs and eyes.

„ Before connecting the hydraulic hoses to the machine, depressurise the hydraulic system on both sides.

„ Before uncoupling the hoses and performing work on the hydraulic system, depressurise the hydraulic system.

„ When connecting the quick couplings, ensure that they are clean and dry.

„

Check hydraulic hoses at regular intervals refer to page 194 and replace them if they are

damaged (e.g chafing areas or points of contact) or aged. The replacement lines must comply with the technical requirements of the device manufacturer.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to soiling of the hydraulic system

If foreign objects or liquids get into the hydraulic system, the hydraulic system may be severely damaged.

„ When connecting the quick couplings, ensure that they are clean and dry.

„ Check the hydraulic hoses for abrasion and pinch point and replace if required.

1

2

RPG000-117

To connect the hydraulic hoses (1) correctly, the hydraulic hoses (1) are marked with numbers.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 57

7

7.4

Commissioning

Connecting hydraulic brake (export)

Hydraulic hoses (1) for connection to a single-acting control unit are marked with a number and the plus sign, e.g. (1+).

Additional explanations, e.g. the meaning of the coloured caps, can be found on the label (2) on the machine.

„ Depressurise the tractor hydraulics.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Clean and dry the connections of the hydraulic quick connector.

Hydraulic connection for return to the tank

„ Connect the hydraulic hose (blue, T) with the depressurised return on the tractor.

Opening/closing the hydraulic connection for the tailgate

„ Connect the hydraulic hose (red, 1+) to a single-acting control unit of the tractor.

Lifting/lowering hydraulic connection for pick-up and lifting/lowering blade cassette

„ Connect the hydraulic hose (yellow, 3+) to a single-acting control unit of the tractor.

Hydraulic connections for the support jack (for version with "Hydraulic support jack")

„ Connect the hydraulic hose lines (green 5+, green 5-) to a double-acting control unit of the tractor.

Hydraulic connections for the blade group control system (for version with

"Hydraulic blade group control system")

„ Connect the hydraulic hose lines (green 7+, green 7-) to a double-acting control unit of the tractor.

7.4

Connecting hydraulic brake (export)

A hydraulic brake may be required on the machine to meet country specific standards. A brake valve is required on the tractor for the hydraulic brake. The corresponding hydraulic hose is connected to the brake valve on the tractor. The brake is activated by actuating the brake pedal.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Connect the hydraulic hose of the hydraulic brake to the connection for the hydraulic brake on the tractor.

7.5

58

Coupling the hydraulic auxiliary brake

For "hydraulic auxiliary brake" version

For certain operating conditions it is advisable to install a hydraulic auxiliary brake to machines which normally do not require a separate brake for road transport.

For this an additional single-action control valve is required. The brake is activated by actuating the control valve.

The pressure can be adjusted with the machine's pressure limiting valve. The pressure limiting valve is set to approx. 50 bar.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

7.6

Commissioning

Connecting/disconnecting compressed air connections for the compressed air brake

Connecting/disconnecting compressed air connections for the compressed air brake

The machine features a dual-line compressed air braking system. The coupling heads are connected to the machine for attachment of the supply line (2) (red coupling head) and brake line (1) (yellow coupling head) of the tractor.

7

7.6

1 2

7.7

BP000-101

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Connecting

Observe the correct order when connecting the compressed air lines.

„ Firstly, connect the brake line (1) (yellow coupling head).

„ Then connect the supply line (2) (red coupling head).

Disconnecting

Observe the correct order when disconnecting the compressed air lines.

„ Firstly, disconnect the supply line (2) (red coupling head).

„ Then disconnect the brake line (1) (yellow coupling head).

Adjusting drawbar eye

For "drawbar eye bottom" version

I II

1

RP000-266

2

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

1 2

59

7

7.8

Commissioning

Connecting KRONE terminal DS 500

In order to obtain more universal shaft clearance, the drawbar eye can be mounted in position

(I) or (II) on the drawbar (1). Only drawbar eyes for version with "Drawbar eye at bottom" can be rotated.

„ Remove the screw connection (2).

„ Rotate the drawbar eye into the desired position (I) or (II) and use the screw connection (2) to mount it on the drawbar (1).

„ Ensure that the toothed disc connections mesh.

7.8

Connecting KRONE terminal DS 500

NOTICE

Short circuit caused by impurities and moisture in the plug connection

The machine may be damaged by a short circuit.

„ Make sure that the plugs and sockets are clean and dry.

60

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Tractors with integrated ISOBUS system

Commissioning

Connecting KRONE terminal DS 500

7

7.8

1

1

4

7

3

6

9

3 2

4 5 6

7 8

EQ003-251

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Connection terminal to tractor

„ Connect the 9-pin plug (2) of the cable (1) to the 9-pin socket (3) (In-cab).

Connection tractor to machine

INFORMATION

The cable (6) can be ordered by quoting the order number 20 086 886 *.

„ Connect the 9-pin plug (5) of the cable (6) to the 9-pin ISOBUS socket (4) of the tractor.

„ Connect the 11-pin plug (7) of the cable (6) to the 11-pin socket (8) of the machine.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 61

7

7.9

Commissioning

Connecting the KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200)

Tractors without ISOBUS system

1

7.9

62

2

3 4

B290

7 8

5

6

EQ003-252

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The accessories kit B290 “KRONE tractor retrofitting” is mounted.

Connection terminal to tractor

„ Connect the 9-pin plug (2) of the cable (1) to the 9-pin socket (3) (In-cab).

Connection tractor to machine

INFORMATION

The cable (6) can be ordered by quoting the order number 20 086 886 *.

„ Connect the 9-pin plug (5) of the cable (6) to the 9-pin ISOBUS socket (4) of the tractor.

„ Connect the 11-pin plug (7) of the cable (6) to the 11-pin socket (8) of the machine.

Connecting the KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200)

NOTICE

Short circuit caused by impurities and moisture in the plug connection

The machine may be damaged by a short circuit.

„ Make sure that the plugs and sockets are clean and dry.

INFORMATION

To mount the terminal in the tractor cabin, observe the provided operating instructions of terminal.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Commissioning

Connecting the KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200)

Tractors with integrated ISOBUS system

CCI 1200

CCI 800

7

7.9

1 1

2 3

5 4

1

4

7

3

6

9

8 9 10

6 7

EQ001-173

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Connection terminal to tractor

„ Connect the 12-pin plug (2) of the cable (3) to the 12-pin socket (1) of the terminal.

„ Connect the 9-pin plug (4) of the cable (3) to the 9-pin socket (5) (In-cab).

Connection tractor to machine

INFORMATION

The cable (8) can be ordered by quoting the order number 20 086 886 *.

„ Connect the 9-pin plug (7) of the cable (8) to the 9-pin ISOBUS socket (6) of the tractor.

„ Connect the 11-pin plug (9) of the cable (8) to the 11-pin socket (10) of the machine.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 63

7 Commissioning

7.10

Connecting foreign ISOBUS terminal

Tractors without ISOBUS system

CCI 800

1

CCI 1200

5

3 2

4

B290

7.10

9 10

6

7

8

EQ001-181

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The accessories kit B290 “KRONE tractor retrofitting” is mounted.

Connection terminal to tractor

„ Connect the 12-pin plug (2) of the cable (3) to the 12-pin socket (1) of the terminal.

„ Connect the 9-pin plug (4) of the cable (3) to the 9-pin socket (5) (In-cab).

Connection tractor to machine

INFORMATION

The cable (8) can be ordered by quoting the order number 20 086 886 *.

„ Connect the 9-pole plug (7) of the cable (8) to the 9-pole ISOBUS socket (6) of the tractor.

„ Connect the 11-pole plug (9) of the cable (8) to the 11-pole socket (10) of the machine.

Connecting foreign ISOBUS terminal

NOTICE

Short circuit caused by impurities and moisture in the plug connection

The machine may be damaged by a short circuit.

„ Make sure that the plugs and sockets are clean and dry.

64

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Commissioning 7

Connecting foreign ISOBUS terminal 7.10

INFORMATION

To mount the terminal in the tractor cabin, observe the provided operating instructions of terminal.

1 5 2 4 3

EQ001-146

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Connection tractor to machine

„ Connect the 9-pole plug (5) of the cable (2) to the 9-pole ISOBUS socket (1) of the tractor.

„ Connect the 11-pole socket (4) of the cable (2) to the 11-pole socket (3) of the machine.

Connection terminal to tractor

INFORMATION

For further details on terminal connection, observe operating instructions of ISOBUS terminal manufacturer.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 65

7 Commissioning

7.11

Connecting the camera to the KRONE ISOBUS terminal CCI 800 or CCI 1200

7.11

Connecting the camera to the KRONE ISOBUS terminal CCI 800 or

CCI 1200

2

CCI 800

CCI 1200

1

5

4 3

7.12

EQ000-212

„ Insert the plug (4) on the camera (2) cable (3) into the connection C (1) of the KRONE

ISOBUS terminal CCI 800 or CCI 1200 .

„ To connect the plug (4) correctly, ensure that it is aligned with the marked points (5).

Connecting the road lighting

NOTICE

Short circuit caused by impurities and moisture in the plug connection

The machine may be damaged by a short circuit.

„ Make sure that the plugs and sockets are clean and dry.

66

BPG000-067

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

7.13

Commissioning 7

Mounting safety chain 7.13

The road travel lighting is connected by means of the enclosed 7-pin lighting cable (2).

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Connect the 7-pin plug of the lighting cable (2) to the 7-pin socket (1) of the machine.

„ Connect the 7-pin plug of the lighting cable (2) to the 7-pin socket (3) of the tractor.

„ Lay the lighting cable (2) so that it does not touch the tractor wheels.

Mounting safety chain

WARNING

Risk of accident due to a incorrectly dimensioned safety chain

When using a incorrectly dimensioned safety chain, the safety chain may tear if the machine loosens unintentionally. This may result in serious accidents.

„ Always use safety chain with a minimum tensile strength of 178 kN (40,000 lbf).

WARNING

Risk of injury or damage to the machine due to incorrectly installed safety chain.

If the installed safety chain is too taut or too slack, the safety chain may tear. As a result, people may be seriously injured or the tractor and machine may be damaged.

„ Install the safety chain in such a way that, when cornering, it is not tensioned and does not come into contact with the tractor wheels or other parts of the tractor or machine.

INFORMATION

The country-specific regulations for using the safety chain during transportation of the machine must be observed.

The safety chain serves as an additional safety precaution for trailed devices in case these come loose from the hitch during transport. Attach the safety chain with the respective mounting parts to the hitching device holder of the tractor or to another specified coupling point. The safety chain should have enough play when driving around curves.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 67

7 Commissioning

7.13

Mounting safety chain

RP000-104

„ Mount the safety chain (1) on the machine.

BP000-106

„ Install the safety chain (1) at a suitable position (for example: [I] or [II]) on the tractor.

68

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

8

Operation

Preparation before baling

8

8.1

Operation

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, refer to page 15 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 27

.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unpredictable movement of the round bales when the machine is operating on a slope

If round bales are deposited on a slope, they may start moving on their own. Once round bales have started moving, their weight and cylindrical shape may cause serious accidents and injure people.

„ On slopes, deposit round bales in manual mode only.

„ On slopes, always deposit round bales in such a way that they cannot start moving on their own.

8.1

Preparation before baling

ü The bale formation conveyor is in working position,

refer to page 73 .

ü

The pick-up is in working position, refer to page 79

.

ü The crop press roller unit has been correctly set according to the amount of crops,

refer to page 82

.

ü The wrapping material has been correctly inserted.

Net wrapping:

refer to page 87

Chamber film wrapping: refer to page 90

ü The baling pressure is set,

refer to page 163

.

ü The required cutting length has been set,

refer to page 165 .

ü

The customer counter has been set to 0, refer to page 140 .

•

The working screen has been selected, refer to page 114

.

8.2

Filling the bale chamber

NOTICE

Machine damage due to machine overload

If round bales are too firm or too large, the machine may be damaged and the service life considerably reduced. In the event of an overload, forced tying is automatically actuated which is saved on the terminal.

„ Press only round bales which do not exceed the maximum set bale diameter.

„ Observe the following information on the even filling of the bale chamber.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 69

8

8.2

Operation

Filling the bale chamber

NOTICE

Risk of damage to the bale formation conveyor due to barrel-shaped round bales

Distorted and compacted round bales may damage the bale formation conveyor. Also, proper silage production cannot be guaranteed.

„ Only bale evenly shaped and compressed round bales.

„ Observe the notices for even filling of the bale chamber.

To attain a consistent bale density inside a round bale, the bale chamber must be filled evenly.

Here, the swath width is important. The swath width is ideal if the swath has exactly the same width as the bale chamber.

If swaths are too wide

The pressed round bales do not have an exact shape. Also the round bale is frayed on the sides and difficult to eject from the bale chamber.

„ Make the swaths narrower on the field.

„ Reduce the baling pressure,

refer to page 163 .

If the swath is too narrow

Even filling of the bale chamber is possible only if the swath is approached alternating from the left and the right side. Too frequent changes and uneven filling of the bale chamber will produce barrel-shaped round bales and uneven baling density.

70

RP000-062

„ Travel longer sections on the left respectively right side of the swath (1). Observe a length of roughly X=20 m on one side.

„ Avoid swerving (2).

If the swath is small and flat

„ Reduce the PTO speed.

„ Increase the driving speed.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

8.3

8.3.1

Operation

Improving bale chamber filling

8

8.3

For very wet crops with little structure

If the crops are very wet and have little structure, this may increase slippage of the bale formation conveyor. This can be reduced by taking the following measures:

„

Reduce the number of blades in the cutting unit or completely swivel out the blades, refer to page 84

.

„ Reduce the baling pressure,

refer to page 163 .

„ Setting a low bale core density,

refer to page 163 .

For short and brittle straw

„ Reduce the baling pressure,

refer to page 163 .

„

Reduce the number of blades in the cutting unit or completely swivel out the blades, refer to page 84

.

„ Setting a low bale core density,

refer to page 163 .

„ Start the tying cycle earlier than indicated.

„ To largely prevent short, brittle straw from falling out of the bale chamber when driving from one swath to the next swath, switch off the PTO shaft in the meantime.

Driving speed

KRONE recommends a driving speed of 5-12 km/h

The driving speed during the work must be adapted to the following conditions:

• Type of crops

• Moisture content of crops

• Swath height

• Ground conditions

Additional tips for filling the bale chamber

• Reduce the driving speed at the start and at the end of the filling process to ensure consistent bale sizes.

• Crops can already be picked up again while the tailgate is still closing.

• The shorter the crops in the bale chamber, the greater the friction on the side walls. As such, the overload clutch can engage more frequently. Moreover, short crops can be compressed more easily. That's why the baling pressure can be lowered with the blades

swivelled in without the bale density being reduced, refer to page 163

. The response of the overload clutch can be reduced in this way.

Improving bale chamber filling

Reducing the pressure on the side walls of the bale chamber

If very heavy crops without structure are picked up, the round bales may become very hard and press on the side walls of the machine. Then reliable rotation of the round bale can be increased in the bale chamber by taking the following measures:

„ To reduce the pressure on the side walls, do not drive too far to the right or left.

„ Take the outer blades out of the cutting unit or completely switch off the cutting unit.

„ Reduce the baling pressure,

refer to page 163 .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 71

8

8.3

8.3.2

Operation

Improving bale chamber filling

Mounting additional driver guide rails on the starter roller

1

2

8.3.3

RP000-285

To increase reliable rotation of the round bales, 6 additional driver guide rails (1) can be mounted on the starter roller (2).

The driver guide rails (1) on the starter roller must be mounted inside the bale chamber.

The driver guide rails (1) can be ordered by quoting the following order numbers:

KRONE component

Driver guide rails (6x)

Fixing material (30x)

Order number

20 461 612 *

00 904 025 *

ü The tailgate is opened and secured,

refer to page 76

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Mount the 6 driver guide rails (1) on the starter roller (2).

Mounting additional deflector sheets in the tailgate

1

1

2

3

72

RPG000-060

If the finished round bales do not fall out of the bale chamber, 2 deflector sheets (1) can be mounted on the right and left in the machine tailgate.

The deflector sheets (1) can be ordered by quoting the following order number:

KRONE component

Deflector sheets 2x

Order number

00 275 479 *

ü The tailgate is opened and secured,

refer to page 76

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Mount the deflector sheets (1) on the insides of the bale chamber by screwing the screw connections (2) into the available boreholes.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

8.4

8.5

8.6

Operation

Completing the baling process, starting tying cycle and ejecting round bales

8

8.4

If the finished round bales are still not falling out of the bale chamber following installation of the deflector sheets (1):

„ Remove the slide sheets (3) from the right and left sides of the machine housing.

Completing the baling process, starting tying cycle and ejecting round bales

„ Read off the status of the bale chamber filling on the terminal,

refer to page 110 .

„ Stop the tractor.

„ Start the tying process in automatic mode or start it in manual mode.

„ Wait until the tying process is complete.

„ Special feature of version with "Net and chamber film wrapping" and active chamber film wrapping:

When starting chamber film wrapping, pick up crops until the film is caught by the round bale and the film roll starts to rotate.

„ Open the tailgate and eject the round bale. Make sure that the tailgate is always fully open to ensure the pressure for the bale formation conveyor tension is established.

„ Close the tailgate at idle speed.

„ Start the next baling process.

Moving bale formation conveyors into the working / parking position

Before starting baling work, the bale formation conveyors must be moved into the working position and hydraulically clamped. After finishing baling work, the bale formation conveyors must be moved for protection back into the parking position and declamped.

„ To move the bale formation conveyors into the parking position, reduce the baling pressure via the menu "Electronic baling pressure adjustment" ,

refer to page 133 .

„ To move the bale formation conveyors into the working position, increase the baling pressure via the menu "Electronic baling pressure adjustment"

, refer to page 133

.

Operating the support jack

INFORMATION

In order to increase the base of the support jack when the ground is soft, use a suitable support.

The support jack is used to keep the machine stable when it is not connected to the tractor. The support jack must be used whenever the machine is parked.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The machine is connected to the tractor,

refer to page 55

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 73

8

8.6

Operation

Operating the support jack

For version with "Mechanical support jack"

1

2

3

4

I II

5

1

RPG000-063

In order to rotate the crank handle (1), you can select the following 2 positions:

Crank handle position (1)

Pushed in – Position [I]

Pulled out – Position [II]

Explanation

The support jack (2) raises or lowers at low speed. Less force must be applied.

The support jack (2) raises or lowers at high speed. More force must be applied.

„ To move the crank handle to position [I] remove the spring cotter pin (5), push in the crank handle (1) and secure with the spring cotter pin (5).

„ To move the crank handle to position [II] remove the spring cotter pin (5), pull out the crank handle (1) completely and secure with the spring cotter pin (5).

Moving the support jack into support position

„ Turn the crank handle (1) several revolutions anti-clockwise.

WARNING! Crush hazard due to the support jack! Keep hands and feet out of the danger zone of the support jack.

„ Pull out the securing pin (4), extend the parking support (2) and secure the position using the securing pin (4).

„ Turn the support jack (2) anti-clockwise firmly down onto the ground using the crank handle (1) until the drawbar is relieved.

Moving the support jack into transport position

„ Turn the crank handle (1) several revolutions clockwise until the support plate (3) is relieved.

WARNING! Crush hazard due to the support jack! Keep hands and feet out of the danger zone of the support jack.

„ Pull out the securing pin (4), push in the support jack (2) and secure the position with the securing pin (4).

„ Turn the support jack (2) clockwise all the way up using the crank handle (1).

„ Rotate the support plate (3) so that the flat side points towards the pick-up.

74

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Operation

Operating the support jack

8

8.6

For version with "Hydraulic support jack"

Moving support jack into support position

2

1

4

5

3

1

3

6

RP000-117

„ Detach the bolt (1) from the locking spring (2) and turn it by 90° to the right so that the locking pin (3) is no longer locked.

„ Pull out the bolt (1).

WARNING! Crush hazard due to support jack swinging down! Fold the support jack up or down using the handle (4) only.

„ Fold down support jack (5) by 180°.

„ Guide the bolt (1) with handle to the right into the opening (6) and turn it by 90° to the left so that the locking pin (3) locks.

„ Actuate the double-acting control unit (green, 5-) until the support jack (5) is firmly on the ground and the drawbar eye is relieved.

Moving support jack into transport position

2

1

7

1

5

6

4

3

RP000-116

„ Actuate the double-acting control unit (green, 5+) until the support jack (3) has been retracted.

„ Turn the bolt (1) by 90° to the right so that the locking pin (2) is no longer locked.

„ Pull out the bolt (1).

„ Fold up the lower part of the support jack (3) by 180°.

WARNING! Crush hazard due to support jack swinging down! Swivel the support jack up or down using the handle (4) only.

„ Insert the bolt (1) through the boreholes (5, 6) and secure it in the locking spring (7).

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 75

8

8.7

8.7

Operation

Using the stop cock of the tailgate

Using the stop cock of the tailgate

WARNING

Risk of injury if the stop cock of the tailgate is opened

When working on or underneath the opened tailgate or inside the bale chamber, the tailgate may drop down in an uncontrolled manner if the stop cock is opened. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Always close the stop cock when carrying out work with the tailgate open.

I II

8.8

1

1

RPG000-014

The tractor supplies the machine hydraulics via hydraulic hoses. The tailgate stop cock (1) is a safety component which prevents the tailgate from unintentionally closing. The tailgate stop cock (1) must be closed if working in the bale chamber or on the tailgate.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Opening the stop cock

„ Lift the stop cock (1) and turn into position (I).

Æ The tailgate can be closed.

Closing the stop cock

„ Lift the stop cock (1) and turn into position (II).

Æ The tailgate cannot be closed.

Releasing/applying the parking brake

1

2

RPG000-131

76

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Operation

Fitting wheel chocks

8

8.9

The parking brake (2) is located on the front side of the machine on the drawbar. The parking brake (2) is used to secure the machine from unintentionally rolling away, .

In order to prevent the machine from rolling away, also use the wheel chocks,

refer to page 77 .

The figure shows the parking brake applied.

Applying the parking brake (2)

„ Apply the parking brake (2) until the resistance has increased noticeably.

Releasing the parking brake (2)

„ Push in the key (1) and press parking brake (2) all the way down.

Attaching safety cable of the parking brake

1

2

3

8.9

RP000-399

The safety cable (1) applies the parking brake (3) if the machine breaks away from the tractor while it is driving.

„ To attach the safety cable (1) to the machine, attach the safety cable (1) to the parking brake (3). To do this, pull the safety cable (1) through the smaller loop of the safety cable (1) and through the ring (2).

„ To attach the safety cable (1) to the tractor, attach the other end of the safety cable (1) to a suitable point at the back of the tractor.

„ Ensure that the safety cable (1) cannot slip or become detached.

Fitting wheel chocks

2

1

RPG000-012

The wheel chocks (1) secure the machine against rolling away. 2 wheel chocks are affixed to the machine.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 77

8 Operation

8.10

Removing/mounting the safety device which prevents unauthorised use

For "Parking brake" version: In order to prevent the machine from rolling away, use the

parking brake in addition to the wheel chocks (1), refer to page 76

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ To dismount the wheel chocks (1) from the machine, press the supports (2) down, pull the wheel chocks (1) upwards, and remove them.

1 1

8.10

RPG000-180

„ Park the machine on level and firm ground.

„ Place the wheel chocks (1) so close before and behind the same wheel that the machine cannot roll off.

Removing/mounting the safety device which prevents unauthorised use

The safety device is used to prevent unauthorised use when the machine has been switched off.

ü The machine has been parked,

refer to page 158

.

For version with "ball-head attachment" or "drawbar eye attachment"

I

2

II

2

78

3

1 3

KS000-414

I Version with ball-head attachment

1

II Version with drawbar eye attachment

Removing

„ Remove the padlock (1), the latch (2) and the bracket (3) and take them with you.

Mounting

„ Mount the bracket (3) with the latch (2) and secure with the padlock (1) and keep the key in a safe place.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

8.11

Operation 8

Operating brake force regulator 8.11

Operating brake force regulator

For version with "Single axle with compressed air brake" or "Tandem axle with compressed air brake"

I

II

1

III

RP000-873

The brake force regulator (1) regulates the brake force of the compressed air brake. The brake force may be reduced under certain conditions in use. When driving on public roads, the brake force regulator (1) must be set to full load (I). The following positions are possible:

Position

(I)

(II)

(III)

Brake force

Full load (1/1)

Half load (1/2) switched off (0)

„ Turn the brake force regulator (1) in the direction of the arrow to the required position.

Pick-up 8.12

8.12.1

Bringing the pick-up to transport/working position

Working position

WARNING! Risk of injury due to falling pick-up! While the pick-up is being lowered, remove people from the movement range of the pick-up.

„ To preselect the pick-up, press the  key on the terminal,

refer to page 108 .

ð The key switches to  .

„ To lower the pick-up into the working position, actuate the control unit on the tractor (yellow,

3+).

Transport position

WARNING! Risk of injury due to falling pick-up! While the pick-up is being lowered, remove people from the movement range of the pick-up.

„ To preselect the pick-up, press the  key on the terminal,

refer to page 108 .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 79

8 Operation

8.12

Pick-up

8.12.2

ð The key switches to  .

„ To lift the pick-up into the transport position, actuate the control unit on the tractor (yellow,

3+).

Setting the pick-up working height

2

3

1 4

5

80

RPG000-151

The working height of the pick-up (3) must be set so that the distance between the tines and the ground is approx. 20-30 mm . Also the working height of the pick-up (3) must be adjusted to the ground conditions.

ü

The drawbar height has been set correctly, refer to page 48

.

Make the following setting on the right and left sides of the pick-up in the same way:

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Remove the linch pin (2).

„ Take the guide wheel (5) on the handle (4) and insert at the necessary position on the perforated bar (1).

„ Secure with the linch pin (2).

„ Lower the pick-up (3) with the control unit (yellow, 3+).

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Check whether the distance between the tines and the ground is approx. 20-30 mm .

„ If required, re-adjust the guide wheel (5) in the perforated bar (1).

Setting the pick-up working height more precisely

1

2

III

II

I

3

RPG000-127

If ground conditions are extreme, the height of the pick-up can also be set via the chain (3). To do this, the pick-up can be set higher or lower by one complete chain link or even more precisely via the chain holder (1).

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

8.12.3

Operation 8

Crop press roller unit 8.13

When used in straw, the pick-up should be set as high as possible off the ground. Then use the chain (3) to adjust the guide wheels of the pick-up so that they do not touch the ground.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The pick-up is fully raised in transport position,

refer to page 79

.

ü The guide wheels are folded upwards.

Make the following setting on the right and left sides of the machine in the same way:

„ Open the side hood.

„ Remove the linch pin (2).

„ Attach the chain (3) higher or lower by one complete chain link or attach the required chain link in position (I), (II) or (III).

„ Mount the linch pin (2).

„

Check whether the drawbar height of the machine must be adjusted to the tractor, refer to page 48

.

Adjusting the bearing pressure relief for the pick-up

8.13

1

2

X

3

RPG000-128

To be able to negotiate uneven ground better, the pick-up is relieved on both sides of the machine with the aid of a spring (3). The spring (3) can be set on the ring screw (2).

KRONE recommends the following setting:

• Dimension X (left side of machine): 150 mm

• Dimension X (right side of machine): 42 mm

ü The guide wheels have been adequately relieved.

„ On the right and left sides of the machine check whether the aforementioned dimensions match.

„ If required, screw in or unscrew the nut (1) until the aforementioned dimension X has been set.

Crop press roller unit

WARNING

Risk of injury if the machine is used without a crop press roller unit

The crop press roller unit is used for accident protection! If the machine is operated without a roller crop guide, people can be seriously injured or killed.

„ Never operate the machine without a crop press roller unit.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 81

8 Operation

8.13

Crop press roller unit

8.13.1

Setting the crop press roller unit

1

8.13.2

3

2

RPG000-110

The crop press roller unit (3) guides the crops at the intake via the pick-up.

The height of the crop press roller unit (3) must be set so that the operating crop press roller (2) continuously touches the swath.

Adjusting the height of the crop press roller unit

Make the following setting on the right and left sides of the pick-up in the same way:

„ Attach the chain (1) to the swath correspondingly higher or lower.

Setting the baffle sheet on the crop press roller unit

11

2

1

3

5

4 7

4 10 2 4 6 2

5 3

5 3

9 8

12 13

RP000-140

The height of the baffle sheet (1) on the crop press roller unit can be adjusted to the swath.

Position (I) has been set at the factory. If the crops are very moist, it is recommended to move the baffle sheet into position (II).

82

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Operation 8

Crop press roller unit 8.13

Moving the baffle sheet (1) from position (I) to position (II)

Make the following setting on the right and left sides of the machine in the same way:

„ To remove the bracket (2):

• pull out the linch pin (3),

• loosen the round-head screw (4),

• remove the spring (11) and

• remove the bracket (2).

„ Remove the linch pin (5).

„ Move the baffle sheet (1) in the upper borehole (13) and secure with the linch pin (5).

„ To mount the bracket (2):

• insert the round-head screw (4) into the front rectangular borehole (6) and fasten with spacer tube (7), disc (8) and locknut (9),

• place the bracket (2) on the bolt (3) and secure with the linch pin (3) and

• mount the spring (11).

8.13.3

Moving the baffle sheet (1) from position (II) to position (I)

Make the following setting on the right and left sides of the machine in the same way:

„ To remove the bracket (2):

• pull out the linch pin (3),

• loosen the round-head screw (4),

• remove the spring (11) and

• remove the bracket (2).

„ Remove the linch pin (5).

„ Move baffle sheet (1) into the lower borehole (12) and secure with the linch pin (5).

„ To mount the bracket (2):

• insert the round-head screw (4) into the front rectangular borehole (10) and fasten with spacer tube (7), disc (8) and locknut (9),

• place the bracket (2) on the bolt (3) and secure with the linch pin (3) and

• mount the spring (11).

Removing/mounting the baffle sheet on the crop press roller unit

In operation the baffle sheet must have been mounted on the crop press roller unit. The baffle sheet on the crop press roller unit can be briefly removed in the event of crop blockages.

Removing crop blockages:

refer to page 96

1 2 3

4

RPG000-152

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 83

8 Operation

8.14

Cutting unit

Removing

„ Remove the linch pins (3) from the right and left sides of the pick-up.

„ Remove the spring (4) from the right and left sides of the pick-up.

„ Push the baffle sheet (1) to one side and remove.

Mounting

„ • Place the baffle sheet (1) on the crop press roller (2) and secure with the linch pins (3) on the right and left sides of the pick-up.

„ Mount the spring (4).

8.14

Cutting unit

8.14.1

Lifting/lowering blade cassette

WARNING

Crush hazard due to lowering or lifting of the blade cassette

Lifting and lowering the blade cassette may crush body parts.

„ Before lifting or lowering the blade cassette, ensure that there is nobody inside the danger zone of the blade cassette.

„ Before doing any work on the blade cassette, shut down and safeguard the machine,

refer to page 27 .

„ To preselect the blade cassette, press the  key on the terminal,

refer to page 108

.

8.14.2

ð The key switches to  .

„ To lift the blade cassette, actuate the control unit in the tractor (yellow, 3+).

„ To lower the blade cassette, actuate the control unit in the tractor (yellow, 3-).

For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system": The blade cassette is lifted and

lowered via the control unit on the tractor (green 7+, green 7-), refer to page 116 .

Swivelling blade groups in/out

The cutting unit blades are divided into two groups A and B. These groups A and B can be individually or completely swivelled in or out. The number of blades used determines the cutting length of the crops,

refer to page 165

.

ü The pick-up is fully raised in transport position,

refer to page 79

.

ü The blade cassette has been lowered,

refer to page 84

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

84

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

For version with "Mechanical blade group control system"

Operation 8

Cutting unit 8.14

1

RP000-475

The tool (1) is in the storage compartment.

„ To take the supplied tool (1) out of the storage compartment, unscrew the fastening screw.

„ After working on the blade cassette, mount the tool (1) in the storage compartment using the fastening screw.

For "Tandem axle" version:

1

RP000-478

+

2 3 x -

RP000-146

The icons in the figure and on the label have the following meaning:

A

B x -

2

3

+

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 85

86

8 Operation

8.14

Cutting unit

Icon

+

Explanation

Manually swivelling in blades (working position)

Swivelling out blades manually x -

„ For "tandem axis" version: Remove the supplied tool (1).

„ To swivel in the blade group A, use the tool (1) to turn the screw (2) in direction 

+

.

+

.

„ To swivel in the blade group B, use the tool (1) to turn the screw (3) in direction 

„ To swivel out the blade group A, use the tool (1) to turn the screw (2) in direction  x -

.

„ To swivel out the blade group B, use the tool (1) to turn the screw (3) in direction  x .

For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system"

„

Swivel the blade groups hydraulically in or out via the terminal, refer to page 116 .

NOTICE

For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system"

During operation of the machine, KRONE recommends occasionally swivelling the utilised blade groups in and out to prevent crop blockages.

If individual blades did not swivel in

The following steps must be performed if individual blades did not swivel in after the blade groups were mechanically or hydraulically swivelled in.

Move the blades into the maintenance position as follows:

„ For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system": Move the blade cassette hydraulically via the terminal into the maintenance position,

refer to page 116

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Operation 8

Net wrapping 8.15

8.15

8.15.1

1 2 3

RPG000-154

ü The blade cassette has been lowered,

refer to page 84

.

ü The tailgate is opened and secured,

refer to page 76

.

„ Clean the blades (3) and the blade cassette (1) from the rear side of the machine. In particular, clean the area (2) on the cutting edge of the blade (3).

„ Swivel the blade groups back into the working position.

„ If required, move individual blades, which have not swivelled in, into the working position using a suitable tool, e.g. a plastic hammer, by tapping the back of the blade.

Net wrapping

For version with "Net wrapping"

Inserting the net roll

To ensure that the sleeve clamp can hook completely into the sleeve of the net roll, a cardboard sleeve should be used. If a plastic sleeve with grooves is used, the sleeve clamp may hook into the grooves, transferring the brake force from the brake disc to the net roll. For this reason, plastic sleeves without grooves are not recommended.

When using cardboard sleeves, make sure they are inserted in the correct position. Moisture or high humidity may cause the cardboard sleeve to soften, impairing the tying functionality. Also observe the information on the package provided by the tying material manufacturer.

INFORMATION

For trouble-free use in the field, KRONE recommends one of the "KRONE excellent" nets, see label on the machine with the number 27 016 326 *.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 87

8 Operation

8.15

Net wrapping

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2

8 9 10 11

RPG000-016

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The remaining net rolls in the storage compartment are secured with the retaining rod.

„ Raise the lever (4).

„ Swivel the roll holder (6) and brake disc (1) forwards.

„ Remove the brake disc (1).

„ Take a new net roll out of the package. Ensure that the beginning of the net roll faces towards the machine and can be pulled out from above.

„ Push the net roll (9) onto the roll holder (6) and push on the support (7).

„ Push the brake disc (1) with the sleeve clamps (2) anti-clockwise all the way into the sleeve (10) of the net roll (9).

ð The net roll (9) is permanently locked in the roll holder (6).

„ Swivel the roll holder (6) back into the machine and lift it into the lock using the lever (4).

„ Actuate the wrapping material brake lever (3) so that the roll holder (6) engages with the wrapping material brake.

„ When swivelling in the roll holder, ensure that the tension lever (5) is under the net roll (9).

„ Check that the net roll (9) is aligned centrally. To do this, measure the distances to the left and right side walls.

88

RPG000-017

If the net roll (9) has still not been centrally aligned:

„ Loosen both adjusting rings (8, 11).

„ Use a mounting lever (12) to push the net roll (9) in the required direction of the arrow until the net roll (9) is positioned in the centre.

„ Push both adjusting rings (8, 11) each with a distance of 2-3 mm onto the sleeve (10) and fix them in this position.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

8.15.2

Operation 8

Net wrapping 8.15

Insert net

WARNING

Risk of injury due to sharp blades at the cutting unit of the tying unit

You may injure your fingers and hands when inserting the wrapping and tying material or working in the range of the cutting unit of the tying unit.

„ Always wear protective gloves when inserting the wrapping and tying material and when working in the range of the cutting unit.

„ When working in the range of the cutting unit, work particularly carefully and prudently.

1 2 3 4 5

X

7

6

8

9

RPG000-018

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü You have swung the roll holder forward.

„ Unwind a section of the net (7) from the net roll (1) and guide it over the deflection shaft (2) and under the deflection roll on the cross tube (8).

„ Place the net (7) over the spreading bracket (3).

„ Place the net (7) under the spreading roll (4) on the retaining sheet (6).

„ Guide the net (7) under the synthetic cloth (5). Ensure that the net projects X=170–200 mm over the edge of the retaining sheet (6).

„ Spread the net (7) to a width of approx. 500 mm so that the drivers of the feed roller can pick the net up over its full width.

If the net tension is insufficient and the net is not pulled far enough to the outside of the round bale:

„ Place the net (7) under the deflection tube on the cross tube (9).

To set the feed, cutting and tying position,

refer to page 151

.

To set the number of net layers, refer to page 130

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 89

8 Operation

8.16

Net and chamber film wrapping

8.16

Net and chamber film wrapping

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

8.16.1

Inserting a net or film roll

To ensure that the sleeve clamp can completely catch in the sleeve of the net or film roll, the sleeve should be made of cardboard. If a sleeve is made of plastic with grooves, the sleeve clamp can dig into the grooves and transfer the brake force from the brake disc to the net or film roll. Therefore, plastic sleeves without grooves are not recommended.

If sleeves are made of cardboard, ensure in particular that they are stored correctly. Moisture or high air humidity may cause cardboard sleeves to soften and impair the tying function. Also observe the specifications of the wrapping material manufacturer on the package.

INFORMATION

For trouble-free use in the field, KRONE recommends one of the "KRONE excellent" nets or films, see label on the machine with the number 27 018 640 *.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The remaining net rolls in the storage compartment are secured with the retaining rod.

Before inserting a film roll:

„ Before inserting the film, check the film roll for damage.

If the film roll is damaged:

„ Unwind the damaged film and cut it off.

„ Cut off the bulges at the side of the film roll.

8 9 10 11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2

90

RP000-039

„ Raise the lever (4).

„ Swivel the roll holder (6) and brake disc (1) forwards.

„ Remove the brake disc (1).

„ Take a new net or film roll out of the package. Ensure that the beginning of the roll faces towards the machine and can be pulled out from above.

„ Push the net or film roll (9) onto the roll holder (6) and push on the support (7).

„ Push the brake disc (1) with the sleeve clamps (2) anti-clockwise all the way into the sleeve (10) of the net or film roll (9).

ð The net or film roll (9) is permanently locked in the roll holder (6).

„ Swivel the roll holder (6) back into the machine and lift it into the lock using the lever (4).

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Operation 8

Net and chamber film wrapping 8.16

„ Actuate the wrapping material brake lever (3) so that the roll holder (6) engages with the wrapping material brake.

„ When swivelling in the roll holder, ensure that the tension lever (5) is under the net or film roll (9).

„ Check that the net or film roll (9) is aligned centrally. To do this, measure the distances to the left and right side walls.

8.16.2

RP000-040

If the net or film roll (9) has not been centrally aligned:

„ Loosen the 2 adjusting rings (8, 11).

„ Use a mounting lever (12) to push the net or film roll (9) in the required arrow direction until the net or film roll (9) has been positioned in the centre.

„ Push the 2 adjusting rings (8, 11) each with a distance of 1-2 mm onto the sleeve (10) and fix them in this position.

Inserting the net or film

WARNING

Risk of injury due to sharp blades at the cutting unit of the tying unit

You may injure your fingers and hands when inserting the wrapping and tying material or working in the range of the cutting unit of the tying unit.

„ Always wear protective gloves when inserting the wrapping and tying material and when working in the range of the cutting unit.

„ When working in the range of the cutting unit, work particularly carefully and prudently.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 91

8 Operation

8.16

Net and chamber film wrapping

2

1

3

4

RPG000-183

ü The ignition is switched on.

„ Move the feed rocker arm (3) with the key (4) in the feed position arrow direction until there is a distance of approx. 5 cm between the pressure shaft (2), covered with red foam, and the conical roller (1), .

92

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

8

Operation 8

Net and chamber film wrapping 8.16

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

11

9

X

12

10

RP000-183

The feed plate (7), which is required to insert the wrapping material, is in the storage compartment on the right side.

Pre-settings for net wrapping:

• The tension lever (12) must touch and guide the wrapping material roll (1). To do this, the

tension lever (12) must be released, refer to page 174 .

• The conical roller (3) must be locked to prevent it from rotating during net wrapping,

refer to page 175

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 93

8 Operation

8.16

Net and chamber film wrapping

Pre-settings for chamber film wrapping:

• The tension lever (12) must not touch the wrapping material roll (1). To do this, the tension lever (12) must be locked,

refer to page 174 .

• The conical roller (3) must be released to ensure that it rotates during chamber film

wrapping, refer to page 175

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The roll holder has been swivelled forwards.

ü The conical roller (3) has been locked or released depending on the set net or chamber film

wrapping, refer to page 175

.

ü The tension lever (12) has been locked or released depending on the set net or chamber film wrapping,

refer to page 174 .

ü The wrapping material brake has been set to net or chamber film wrapping,

refer to page 171

.

„ Unwind a section of the wrapping material (11) from the wrapping material roll (1) and guide it over the deflection roll (2) and under the deflection roll on the cross tube (10).

„ Place the wrapping material (11) over the conical roller (3).

„ Place the wrapping material (11) under the spreading roll (4) on the retaining sheet (6).

„ Using the supplied feed plate (7), push the wrapping material (11) between the retaining sheet (6) and the synthetic cloth (5).

„ Ensure that the wrapping material (11) is spread over an area (8) of at least 2 feed strips.

„ Ensure that the wrapping material (11) projects over the edge of the retaining sheet (6)with one of the following lengths:

• For net: X=170–200 mm

• For film: X=230–260 mm

To check the position of the feed rocker arm, refer to page 166

.

To set the number of net layers, refer to page 130

.

To set the number of film layers, refer to page 130 .

8.16.3

Notes on operation

• When chamber film wrapping starts, it is necessary to continue collecting crops until the film is caught by the round bale and the film roll is turning.

• If possible, for initial operation, use a complete net roll first and tie the round bales with net.

This way provides for previous removal of any sharp edges or paint residues.

• KRONE recommends not to use chamber film wrapping for straw bales. There is a risk of condensation forming, resulting in mould.

•

Tie the round bale with the appropriate film tension, refer to page 95 .

• KRONE recommends 3.5-4 film layers to ensure optimum chamber film wrapping,

refer to page 130

. The dryer the crops, the more film layers will be required.

•

KRONE recommends no fewer than 2.5 net layers for optional net wrapping, refer to page 130

. Otherwise, depending on the quality of the net and crops, the expansion force of the crops cannot be absorbed by the net.

• A machine with chamber film wrapping can still tie round bales with net. In doing so, ensure that the the conical roller and the tension lever are set differently.

• Setting the locking of the conical roller:

refer to page 175

• Locking/releasing tension lever:

refer to page 174

94

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

8.16.4

Operation 8

Net and chamber film wrapping 8.16

Checking the tension of the inserted film

The round bale must be tied with the appropriate film tension. KRONE recommends a pretension of 5-15%. You can check whether this pre-tension of 5-15% has been obtained as follows.

1

2

X

RP000-024

ü A round bale is pressed with chamber film wrapping and set down in the field.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Use a marker pen to draw 2 horizontal lines (1) on the film at a distance of X=100 mm .

„ Cut out the section (2) around the 2 lines which you have drawn. Ensure that you cut out all film layers.

„ Allow all film layers of the cut-out section (2) to rest for at least 3 minutes.

„ Measure the distance X between the lines (1) which you have drawn.

Æ If the distance X is between 86 and 95 mm, the pre-tension has been correctly set.

Evaluation Measured value

X

< 86 mm

Pre-tension

> 15%

86 mm

95 mm

> 95 mm

15%

5%

< 5%

The pre-tension is too strong. Reduce the brake force

on the wrapping material brake, refer to page 171

.

Correct

Correct

The pre-tension is too weak. Increase the brake force

on the wrapping material brake, refer to page 171

.

INFORMATION

KRONE recommends 3.5-4 film layers to ensure optimum chamber film wrapping,

refer to page 130

. The minimum required film layers depend on the condition of the crops.

For round bales with a diameter greater than 130 cm and/or very dry or very wet crops,

KRONE recommends using at least one additional film layer.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 95

8 Operation

8.17

Using the bale ejector

8.17

Using the bale ejector

1

RPG000-181

The round bale is automatically conveyed out of the bale chamber by the bale ejector (1) onto the field.

NOTICE

Machine damage due to an incorrectly positioned bale ejector

The connecting rod can be bent if the bale ejector is not positioned on the axis after ejection.

After the round bale has been laid down, the bale chamber is closed and whilst new crops are being taken in, the bale ejector must be positioned again on the axis.

„ Have the setting of the bale ejector be checked by a KRONE service partner.

8.18

Removing crop blockages

8.18.1

Crop blockage at the right-hand and left-hand end of the pick-up

„ Lower the rotational speed.

„ While the PTO shaft is running, reverse and actuate the control unit in the tractor (yellow,

3+) several times to lift and lower the pick-up.

„ Ensure that the crop press roller unit does not collide with the chassis when raised.

If this does not remove the crop blockage:

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

CAUTION! Risk of injury due to sharp parts! Always wear appropriate protective gloves when removing crop blockages.

„ Remove the accumulated crops manually.

„ After remedying the crop blockage, increase the speed to the rated speed again.

8.18.2

Crop blockage in the pick-up

„ Lower the rotational speed.

„ While the PTO shaft is running, reverse and actuate the control unit in the tractor (yellow,

3+) several times to lift and lower the pick-up.

„ Ensure that the crop press roller unit does not collide with the chassis when raised.

If this does not remove the crop blockage:

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Remove the baffle sheet,

refer to page 83 .

96

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

8.18.3

Operation 8

Removing crop blockages 8.18

CAUTION! Risk of injury due to sharp parts! Always wear appropriate protective gloves when removing crop blockages.

„ Manually remove the accumulated crops.

„ Mount the baffle sheet,

refer to page 83 .

Crop blockage under the cutting rotor

RPG000-164

To remove the accumulated crops from under the cutting rotor (1), proceed as follows:

„ Switch off the PTO shaft.

„ Reverse.

„ Ensure that the tractor is in straight alignment with the machine.

„ To lift the pick-up, actuate the control unit on the tractor (yellow, 3+).

„ Switch on the PTO shaft and test at idling speed whether the crop blockage is being removed.

If this does not remove the crop blockage:

For version with "Mechanical blade group control system"

„ Switch off the PTO shaft.

„

Hydraulically lower the blade cassette, refer to page 84

.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„

Manually swivel out the blade groups (setting A/B: -/-), refer to page 85

.

„ Switch on the PTO shaft and test at idling speed whether the crop blockage is being removed.

For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system"

„ Switch off the PTO shaft.

„ To lower the blade cassette hydraulically, actuate the control unit on the tractor (green, 7-).

ð The blade cassette and the blade groups are lowered.

„ Switch on the PTO shaft and test at idling speed whether the crop blockage is being removed.

If this does not remove the crop blockage:

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 97

8 Operation

8.18

Removing crop blockages

CAUTION! Risk of injury due to sharp parts! Always wear appropriate protective gloves when removing crop blockages.

„ Manually remove the accumulated crops.

When the crop blockage has been removed, put the cutting unit back into operation as follows:

ü The PTO shaft is switched off.

„ For version with "Mechanical blade group control system": Lift the blade cassette hydraulically,

refer to page 84 .

„ For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system": To lift the blade cassette hydraulically, actuate the control unit on the tractor (green, 7+).

ð The blade cassette and the blade groups are lifted.

„ Switch on the PTO shaft.

8.18.4

Crop blockage in the baling element

„ Switch on the PTO shaft.

„ Open the tailgate.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„

Close the stop cock, refer to page 76

.

CAUTION! Risk of injury due to sharp parts! Always wear appropriate protective gloves when removing crop blockages.

„ Manually remove the accumulated crops from the baling element.

„

Open the stop cock, refer to page 76

.

„ Switch on the tractor engine and the PTO shaft.

„ Close the tailgate.

„ Resume baling.

98

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

9

9.1

9.2

KRONE Terminal DS 500

Touchable display

KRONE Terminal DS 500

NOTICE

Penetration of water in the terminal could lead to malfunction. As a result, the machine can no longer be operated safely.

„ Protect the terminal from water.

„ If the machine is not used for an extended period of time (for example in winter), the terminal must be stored in a dry place.

„ For mounting and repair jobs, especially for welding jobs on the machine, disconnect the power supply to the terminal.

9

9.1

Touchable display

To provide menu guidance and entry of values/data, the terminal is equipped with a touchcapable display. By touching the display, you can call up and change values in blue font.

Switching terminal on/off

1

EQ003-253

„ Before switching on the terminal for the first time, check that the connections are correct and tight.

INFORMATION

When the terminal is switched on for the first time, the machine configuration is loaded into the terminal and saved in the terminal memory. Loading may take a few minutes.

Switching ON

„ Press and hold down the key (1).

ð If the machine is not connected, the display shows the main menu after switching on.

ð If the machine is connected, the display shows the road travel screen after switching on.

Æ The terminal is ready to operate.

Switching off

„ Press and hold down the key (1).

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 99

9

9.3

9.3

KRONE Terminal DS 500

Design DS 500

Design DS 500

3

1

4

2

5

7

100

6

EQG003-110

The KRONE machine application is divided into the following areas:

Status line (1)

The status line (1) indicates current states of the machine (depending on how it is equipped),

refer to page 107

.

Keys (2)

The machine is operated by pressing the keys  (2) via touch function,

refer to page 108

.

Main window (3)

Values (figures) shown in blue in the main window can be selected using the touch function.

There are the following main window views:

•

Road travel screen, refer to page 115

•

Working screen/s, refer to page 114

•

Working screen, refer to page 110

• Menu level,

refer to page 126

Information bar (4)

The information bar shows information on the working screen, refer to page 113 .

Keys (5)

Alternatively, the machine is operated by pressing the keys (5) without the touch function.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

KRONE Terminal DS 500

Design DS 500

9

9.3

Keys (6)

The keys (6) can be used to open the main menu or the working screen and to confirm the error messages and set the brightness.

Icon Designation

Main menu

Explanation

Open the main menu of the terminal.

ESC

Swap key

ACK (acknowledgement key)

ESC (back key)

Switch between the main menu and the working screen of the terminal.

With more than one machine mask, the views switches to the next one.

Confirm error messages.

Leave the menu without saving.

Brightness Switch from day to night design and vice versa.

Scroll wheel (7)

Alternatively, the values (figures) shown in the main window (3) can be selected and set using the scroll wheel (7). The scroll wheel (7) can also be used to navigate between the individual menus.

Turning the scroll wheel to the right:

• Increase the value.

• Navigate to the next value in the menu.

• Navigate to the next menu.

Turning the scroll wheel to the left:

• Reduce the value.

• Navigate to the previous value in the menu.

• Navigate to the previous menu.

Press the scroll wheel:

• Select the value.

• Save the value.

• Open the menu.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 101

10 KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200)

10.1

Touchable display

10 KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200)

NOTICE

Penetration of water in the terminal could lead to malfunction. As a result, the machine can no longer be operated safely.

„ Protect the terminal from water.

„ If the machine is not used for an extended period of time (for example in winter), the terminal must be stored in a dry place.

„ For mounting and repair jobs, especially for welding jobs on the machine, disconnect the power supply to the terminal.

The ISOBUS system is an internationally standardised communications system for agricultural machines and systems. The designation of the associated series of standards is: ISO 11783.

The agricultural ISOBUS system enables information and data to be exchanged between tractor and unit of different manufacturers. For this purpose, both the required plug connections and the signals are standardised which are required for the communication and transmission of commands. The system also enables machines to be operated with operation units (terminals) which are already available on the tractor or have been attached e.g. to the tractor cabin. The relevant information can be found in the technical documents of the operation device or on the units themselves.

KRONE machines, which have ISOBUS equipment, are coordinated with this system.

1

2

10.1

EQG000-057

The electronic equipment of the machine consists essentially of the job computer (1), the terminal (2) and the control and function elements.

The job computer (1) is located on the right side of the machine under the side hood.

Functions of the job computer (1):

• Control of actuator system installed on the machine.

• Transmission of error messages.

• Evaluation of sensor system.

• Diagnostics of sensor system and actuator system.

The driver gets information by means of the terminal (2) and settings for the operation of the machine are performed which are gathered by the job computer and further processed.

Touchable display

To provide menu guidance and entry of values/data, the terminal is equipped with a touchcapable display. By touching the display, you can call up and change values in blue font.

102

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

10.2

Switching terminal on/off

KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200) 10

Switching terminal on/off 10.2

1

1

EQ001-174

KRONE ISOBUS terminal CCI 1200 KRONE ISOBUS terminal CCI 800

„ Before switching on the terminal for the first time, check that the connections are correct and tight.

INFORMATION

When the terminal is switched on for the first time, the machine configuration is loaded into the terminal and saved in the terminal memory. Loading may take a few minutes.

Switching ON

„ Press and hold down the key (1).

ð If the machine is not connected, the display shows the main menu after switching on.

ð If the machine is connected, the display shows the road travel screen after switching on.

Æ The terminal is ready to operate.

If machine is not connected: “Main menu” If machine is connected: “Road travel screen”

EQG000-056

The display appears in landscape mode after starting the terminal. Refer to the CCI terminal operating instructions if you want the display in portrait rather than landscape mode or if you wish to expand the terminal applications to full view.

Switching off

„ Press and hold down the key (1).

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 103

10 KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200)

10.3

Design of display

INFORMATION

„ For more details on how the terminal functions, follow the terminal operating instructions.

10.3

Design of display

14:31 1 14:31 1

2 2 2 2

10.4

3 3

EQG000-058

Pos.

1

2

Designation

Status line

Main view left/right

Explanation

3 Information view

When operating the machine, KRONE recommends positioning the machine application in the main view.

Additional applications (apps) can be selected from the App menu and displayed in the Information view. The apps can be dragged and dropped into the Main view.

INFORMATION

„ For more details on how the terminal functions, follow the terminal operating instructions.

Design of the KRONE machine application

1

3 2

104

4

EQG000-059

The KRONE machine application is divided into the following areas:

Status line (1)

The status line (1) indicates current states of the machine (depending on how it is equipped),

refer to page 107

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

10.5

KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200) 10

Setting units on the terminal 10.5

Keys (2)

The machine is operated by pressing the keys  (2) via touch function,

refer to page 108

.

Main window (3)

Values (figures) shown in blue in the main window can be selected using the touch function.

There are the following main window views:

•

Road travel screen, refer to page 115

•

Working screen/s, refer to page 114

•

Working screen, refer to page 110

• Menu level,

refer to page 126

Information bar (4)

The information bar shows information on the working screen, refer to page 113 .

Setting units on the terminal

The units, e.g. metric or imperial, can be set on the terminal in the menu "User settings". This setting is accepted after the terminal has been restarted as well as for the machine software.

The procedure and other settings can be found in the operating instructions for the terminal.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 105

11 Foreign ISOBUS terminal

11.1

Varying functions to KRONE ISOBUS terminal

11 Foreign ISOBUS terminal

WARNING

Risk of injury caused by utilization of foreign terminal or other operation units

When using terminals and other operation units which have not been delivered by KRONE mind that the user:

ü assumes the responsibility for the use of KRONE machines when using the machine on operation units (terminal / other operating elements) which have not been delivered by

KRONE.

ü only connects such systems (if possible) which have passed a AEF/DLG/VDMA test (socalled ISOBUS COMPATIBILITY TEST).

ü has to follow the operating and safety instructions of the supplier of ISOBUS operation unit (e.g. terminal).

ü must ensure that the used operating elements and machine controls concerning IL (IL =

Implementation Level; describes compatibility levels of different software versions) must fit together (condition: IL same or higher).

„ Before using the machine, make sure that all machine functions are performed according to the enclosed operating instructions.

INFORMATION

KRONE ISOBUS systems regularly pass the ISOBUS COMPATIBILITY TEST (AEF/DLG/

VDMA test). The operation of this machine at least requires implementation level 3 of

ISOBUS system.

The ISOBUS system is an internationally standardised communications system for agricultural machines and systems. The designation of the associated series of standards is: ISO 11783.

The agricultural ISOBUS system enables information and data to be exchanged between tractor and unit of different manufacturers. For this purpose, both the required plug connections and the signals are standardised which are required for the communication and transmission of commands. The system also enables machines to be operated with operation units (terminals) which are already available on the tractor or have been attached e.g. to the tractor cabin. The relevant information can be found in the technical documents of the operation device or on the units themselves.

KRONE machines, which have ISOBUS equipment, are coordinated with this system.

11.1

Varying functions to KRONE ISOBUS terminal

The job computer provides information and control functions of the machine on the display of the external ISOBUS terminal. Operation with an external ISOBUS terminal is similar to operation with the KRONE ISOBUS terminal. Before commissioning, refer to the mode of operation of the KRONE ISOBUS terminal in the operating instructions.

A major difference to the KRONE ISOBUS terminal is the arrangement and number of keys with functions determined by the selected external ISOBUS terminal.

The values for the bale diameter are set on the third-party ISOBUS terminal via the touch function, see supplied terminal operating instructions.

106

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

12

12.1

Terminal machine functions 12

Status line 12.1

Terminal machine functions

WARNING

Personal injuries and/or machine damage caused by non-compliance of error messages

If error messages are ignored and the malfunction is not remedied, people may be injured and/or the machine may be damaged seriously.

„

Remedy the malfunction when the error message is displayed, refer to page 230

.

„ If the malfunction cannot be remedied, consult a KRONE service partner.

Status line

INFORMATION

Using a terminal with a resolution of less than 480x480 pixels.

On terminals with a resolution of less than 480x480 pixels, only 7 fields are displayed in the status line. Thus, not all icons for the status line are shown.

On terminal with a resolution of more than/equal to 480x480 pixels, 8 fields are shown in the status line.

EQ000-901

Icons displayed with shading ( ) can be selected. If an icon with shading is selected:

• a window with further information opens or

• a function is activated or deactivated.

The status line shows the current states of the machine (depending on how it is equipped):

Icon Explanation

There are one or more error messages.

For version with "Touch-capable display": If this icon is pressed, the pending error messages open in sequence,

refer to page 230

.

Blades swivelled in (activated).

Blades swivelled out (deactivated).

Pre-signalling set.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 107

12 Terminal machine functions

12.2

Keys

Icon Explanation

For version with "TIM 1.0"

TIM status: The machine is being registered and authenticated with the tractor.

TIM status: The machine has been registered and authenticated. By pressing the key 

TIM

, the TIM status switches to  .

TIM status: The machine waits for confirmation of the tractor. Confirmation on the terminal or on another control panel on the tractor causes the TIM status to switch to  .

TIM status: The machine and the tractor are successfully connected. The machine automatically takes over control of the TIM functions on the tractor,

refer to page 118

.

Flashing: 2 TIM functions are currently active, one TIM function of which has been overridden. The connection is restored by pressing the key  confirming on the tractor.

TIM

For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system"

A Blade group A swivelled in (activated).

and then

AB Blade group A and B swivelled in (activated).

B

Blade group B swivelled in (activated).

Blade group A and B swivelled out (deactivated).

Blade groups A and B swivelled out and blade cassette is down to remove the blades (deactivated).

For the “Working lights” version

Switched on.

Switched off.

12.2

Keys

The available icons comply with the equipment of the machine. The following represented icons are not always available.

108

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

A

AB

B

Icon

Terminal machine functions 12

Keys 12.2

Designation Explanation

Feed net in manual mode.

Press the key to guide the net to the round bale.

Feed film in manual mode.

Press the key to guide the film to the round bale.

Switch net wrapping to automatic mode.

Switch net wrapping to manual mode.

The previously selected type of operation, manual mode or automatic mode, in the set type of tying is displayed on the key.

The type of operation is changed by pressing the key.

Switch chamber film wrapping to automatic mode.

Switch the chamber film wrapping to manual mode.

The previously selected type of operation, manual mode or automatic mode, in the set type of tying is displayed on the key.

The type of operation is changed by pressing the key.

Pre-select pick-up.

The setting previously selected, pick-up or blade adjustment is displayed. Press the key to change the setting.

Pre-select blade adjustment.

Open the key selection for

"Hydraulic blade group control system".

Different settings for version with "Hydraulic blade group control system".

The following keys open in order to operate the "Hydraulic blade group control system".

refer to page 116

Open the manual operation menu.

Press the key to have the terminal change directly from the working screen to menu 10, "Manual operation".

Switch the working lights off.

Switch the working lights on.

The previously selected setting "Working lights switched off" or "Working lights switched on" is displayed on the key. Press the key to change the setting.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 109

12 Terminal machine functions

12.3

Displays on the working screen

Icon Designation

Switch the warning beacon off.

Explanation

(Warning beacon only for certain countries)

Switch the warning beacon on.

The previously selected setting "Warning beacon switched off" or "Warning beacon switched on" is displayed on the key. Press the key to change the setting.

Menu level on the terminal. Press the key to open the menu level on the terminal,

refer to page 126 .

Open the Counters menu.

Press the key to open Menu 13 "Counters",

refer to page 139

.

12.3

For version with "TIM 1.0"

The keys can be used to operate the following functions. If the key is greyed out, the function is not available.

Icon

TIM TIM

Explanation

Start TIM functions (can be selected only when tailgate closed).

TIM TIM

Pause TIM functions. In doing so, registration and authentication are not disconnected between tractor and machine.

Displays on the working screen

70

100/ 165 cm

120 170

110

EQG003-009

The available icons comply with the equipment of the machine. The following represented icons are not always available.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Icon

STOP

Terminal machine functions 12

Displays on the working screen 12.3

Explanation

A TIM function is activated on the machine.

Direction display.

70

2

Direction display arrows:

Arrows appear during operation on the left and right sides of the direction display. The arrows have three different sizes, numbered from 1 to 3.

The arrows show the driver to which side and to what extent he must correct his direction when driving over the swath in order to ensure the bale chamber is filled evenly.

If the direction of travel is not corrected, the arrow displayed starts flashing and an acoustic signal sounds.

100/ 165 cm

120

Detailed information on the direction display, refer to page 113

Set and display bale diameter.

170

The bale diameter can be set directly on the working screen,

refer to page 116

.

For version with "TIM 1.0": TIM function "Opening and closing tailgate at the end of the tying cycle" has been activated. The TIM function can be switched off individually via the checkbox, e.g. if the machine is in an unfavourable position for ejecting the round bale. To configure the TIM software,

refer to page 144

Round baler

1

2

3

4

EQG003-122

The round baler in the centre of the working screen shows

• the progress of the baling process by means of the expanding round bale (3),

• the progress of the tying process by means of the net roll (1) and by means of the red net running around the round bale,

• and the bale ejection by means of the opening tailgate (2).

The blade cassette (4) can show the following positions:

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 111

12 Terminal machine functions

12.3

Displays on the working screen

Icon Explanation

The blades have been swivelled in and the blade cassette is in the upper position.

For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system":

The blade groups, which are currently swivelled in, can be found on the status line.

Swivel blade groups in/out,

refer to page 117 .

The blades have been swivelled out and the blade cassette is in the upper position.

The blade cassette is in the lower position.

112

The blade cassette is in the lower position and the blades are unlocked.

This maintenance position is used to change the blades, refer to page 200 .

Icons during net or chamber film wrapping

Icon

1

Explanation

Value of bale diameter/baling pressure has been reached (flashing).

Net/film is fed.

2N 2F

Net/film is not pulled.

3N 3F

Net/chamber film wrapping is running.

4N 4F

Net/chamber film wrapping has stopped.

5N 5F

Net/film is cut off.

6N 6F

Net/film was not cut off.

7N 7F

Net/chamber film wrapping is complete.

8N 8F

9N 9F

Net/film is pulled without a tying cycle having been actuated.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

12.4

Displays on the information bar

Terminal machine functions 12

Displays on the information bar 12.4

12.5

5

123

%

0,0

EQG003-111

The available icons comply with the equipment of the machine. The following represented icons are not always available.

Icon

5

123

Designation

Customer counter

Explanation

The selected customer counter is displayed and shows the current total of pressed round bales.

If the display is pressed, Menu 13-1 "Cus-

tomer counter" opens, refer to page 140

.

%

0,0

Baling pressure The set baling pressure is displayed as a %.

If the display is pressed, Menu 6 "Electronic baling pressure setting" opens so

that the baling pressure can be set, refer to page 133 .

Direction display

1

70

100/ 165 cm

120 170

EQG003-105

The direction display (1) shows the driver to which side and to what extent he must correct his direction when driving over the swath in order to ensure the bale chamber is filled evenly.

The following displays are possible:

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 113

12 Terminal machine functions

12.6

Accessing the working screen

Icon Explanation

Swath is picked up in the middle

1

2

3

3

Step 1:

The bale chamber is filled slightly too much on the left side. Steer the tractor to the left to pick up the swath on the right of the bale chamber.

Step 2:

The bale chamber is filled too much on the left side. Steer the tractor to the left to pick up the swath on the right of the bale chamber.

Step 3:

The bale chamber is filled very heavily on the left side. Steer the tractor to the left to pick up the swath on the right of the bale chamber.

Step 4:

The bale chamber is only filled on the left side. Steer the tractor to the left to pick up the swath on the right of the bale chamber.

Arrow flashes

1

2

3

3

Step 1:

The bale chamber is filled slightly too much on the right side. Steer the tractor to the right to pick up the swath on the left of the bale chamber.

Step 2:

The bale chamber is filled too much on the right side. Steer the tractor to the right to pick up the swath on the left of the bale chamber.

Step 3:

The bale chamber is filled very heavily on the right side. Steer the tractor to the right to pick up the swath on the left of the bale chamber.

Step 4:

The bale chamber is only filled on the right side. Steer the tractor to the right to pick up the swath on the left of the bale chamber.

Arrow flashes

For more information on how the bale chamber is filled, refer to page 69

.

„ If the swath is the same width as the bale chamber, pick up the swath as centrally as possible .

„ If the swath is too narrow, pick it up alternately (on left/right). Ensure that you do not move too far to the left

3

or right

3

.

12.6

Accessing the working screen

Road travel screen Example menu

114

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal machine functions 12

Automatic call of the Road travel screen 12.7

12.7

EQG003-045

From the road travel screen

„ Press .

Æ The working screen is shown,

refer to page 110 .

From each menu

ü One menu is called up.

„ Press longer.

Automatic call of the Road travel screen

EQG000-026

The terminal switches automatically to the Road travel screen after roughly five minutes when the following requirements are met:

ü The PTO shaft is switched off.

ü The tailgate is closed.

ü The machine is in field mode.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 115

12 Terminal machine functions

12.8

Adjusting bale diameter

12.8

Adjusting bale diameter

70

100/ 165 cm

120 170

2

70

100/ 165 cm

1

120 170

12.9

EQG003-037

1 Set setpoint bale diameter in cm 2 Actual bale diameter in cm

Adjusting the bale diameter via the scroll wheel

„ Select the blue value to be changed using the scroll wheel.

ð The icon is shown in reverse colours.

„ Press the scroll wheel.

ð An input field opens.

„ To increase or reduce the value, turn the scroll wheel.

„ To save the value, press the scroll wheel.

ð The setting is accepted, the input field closes.

Adjusting the bale diameter via the touch-capable display

„ Tap the blue value to be changed.

ð An input field opens.

„ Enter the desired value and press .

ð The value is saved and the input field exited.

Operating the hydraulic blade group control system

NOTICE

During operation of the machine, KRONE recommends occasionally swivelling the utilised blade groups in and out to prevent crop blockages in the blade slits.

The hydraulic blade group control system can be used to switch the blades centrally in two groups A and B without installing and removing them. The half set of blades (blade group A or

B) or the complete set of blades (blade groups A and B) can be swivelled in and out from the tractor seat.

The following functions of the blade group control system can be selected. The set function appears on the status line of the working screen.

116

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Icon

A

AB

B

Terminal machine functions 12

Operating the hydraulic blade group control system 12.9

Explanation

Swivel in (activate) blade group A

Swivel in (activate) blade groups A and B

Swivel in (activate) blade group B

Swivel out (deactivate) blade groups A and B

Swivel out blade groups A and B and lower blade cassette.

This maintenance position is used to change the blades, refer to page 200 .

Swivel blade groups in/out

„ Select  on the terminal.

ð The keys of the hydraulic blade group control system are displayed on the side.

„ Select the required function.

Æ The current status of the hydraulic blade group control system is indicated on the status line of the working screen.

After the required function of the blade group control system has been selected, the prompt  appears after approx. 2 seconds to swivel the blades out and to lower the blade cassette via the tractor hydraulics:

„ Confirm the prompt on the display.

„ To swivel out the blades and lower the blade cassette, actuate the control unit (green, 7-).

After approx. 2 seconds, the prompt  appears to swivel in the desired blades and to lift the blade cassette via the tractor hydraulics.

If no blades were selected, no blades will be swivelled in, nevertheless the blade cassette will be raised.

„ Confirm the prompt on the display.

„ To swivel in the blades and to raise the blade cassette, actuate the control unit (green, 7+).

Actuate the maintenance position

The maintenance position serves to swivel out the blades and to lower the blade cassette in one procedure. To enable better removal of the blades, the blades are then lifted up again slightly.

„ On the terminal in the working screen, select .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 117

12 Terminal machine functions

12.10 Operating TIM 1.0 (Tractor Implement Management)

ð The prompt appears after approx. 2 seconds to swivel the blades out via the tractor hydraulics:

„ Confirm the prompt on the display.

„ To swivel out the blades, actuate the control unit (green, 7-).

ð The prompt appears after approx. 2 seconds to lower the blade cassette via the tractor hydraulics.

„ Confirm the prompt on the display.

„ In order to lower the blade cassette, actuate the control unit (green, 7-).

ð The prompt tractor hydraulics.

appears after approx. 2 seconds to lift the blades slightly via the

„ Confirm the prompt on the display.

„ To raise the blades slightly, actuate the control unit (green, 7+).

Æ The status "maintenance position" is indicated on the status line of the working screen.

12.10

Operating TIM 1.0 (Tractor Implement Management)

12.10.1

Mode of operation of TIM 1.0

WARNING

Risk of injury due to unpredictable movement of the round bales when the machine is operating on a slope

If round bales are deposited on a slope, they may start moving on their own. Once round bales have started moving, their weight and cylindrical shape may cause serious accidents and injure people.

„ On slopes, deposit round bales in manual mode only.

„ On slopes, always deposit round bales in such a way that they cannot start moving on their own.

TIM 1.0 (Tractor Implement Management) uses data exchange between the ISOBUS job computers on machine and tractor so that the machine can control the tractor and therefore take pressure off the driver.

When the tying cycle starts, the tractor is automatically stopped by TIM. When the tying cycle is complete, the tailgate is automatically opened by TIM, the round bale is ejected and the tailgate is closed. To bale the next round bale, the driver only has to approach the tractor. Then the tractor driver must independently drive at a speed adjusted to visibility, weather or ground conditions.

118

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal machine functions 12

Operating TIM 1.0 (Tractor Implement Management) 12.10

12.10.2

TIM displays and keys on the working screen

STOP

70

100/ 165 cm

120 170

TIM

EQG003-096

The following TIM displays are possible:

Icon Explanation

For version with "TIM 1.0": TIM function "Opening and closing tailgate at the end of the tying cycle" has been activated. The TIM function can be switched off individually via the checkbox, e.g. if the machine is in an unfavourable position for ejecting the round bale. To configure the TIM software,

refer to page 144

A TIM function is activated on the machine.

STOP

The following status displays could appear in the status line:

Icon Explanation

For version with "TIM 1.0"

TIM status: The machine is being registered and authenticated with the tractor.

TIM status: The machine has been registered and authenticated. By pressing the key 

TIM

, the TIM status switches to  .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 119

12 Terminal machine functions

12.10 Operating TIM 1.0 (Tractor Implement Management)

Icon Explanation

TIM status: The machine waits for confirmation of the tractor. Confirmation on the terminal or on another control panel on the tractor causes the TIM status to switch to  .

TIM status: The machine and the tractor are successfully connected. The machine automatically takes over control of the TIM functions on the tractor,

refer to page 118

.

Flashing: 2 TIM functions are currently active, one TIM function of which has been overridden. The connection is restored by pressing the key  confirming on the tractor.

TIM

and then

The keys can be used to operate the following functions. If the key is greyed out, the function is not available.

Icon

TIM TIM

Explanation

Start TIM functions (can be selected only when tailgate closed).

TIM TIM

Pause TIM functions. In doing so, registration and authentication are not disconnected between tractor and machine.

12.10.3

Activating TIM functions

If the machine was switched off and is switched on again, registration and authentication between tractor and machine are automatically restored. The same control unit is used for the

TIM function "Opening and closing tailgate at the end of the tying cycle" which was used the last time the machine was commissioned.

To activate the TIM functions, only the connection between machine and tractor must be established.

ü In menu 14-5 "Configuring TIM software"(

refer to page 144 )

• the required TIM functions were selected and

• registration and authentication were run on the tractor.

ü The TIM status on the working screen is on  .

„ Press

TIM

.

„ Confirm the TIM functions on the terminal or on another control panel on the tractor.

Æ The TIM status switches to 

TIM functions on the tractor.

. The machine automatically takes over control of the

If no TIM status is displayed on the working screen, the TIM functions must be selected and

registered and authenticated via menu 14-5 "Configuring TIM software", refer to page 144

.

INFORMATION

In the case of the TIM function "Stop tractor when the tying cycle starts", the tractor must be driven at a speed of at least 0.5 km/h before the TIM function can be confirmed on the tractor.

120

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal machine functions 12

Operating machine via joystick 12.11

INFORMATION

If 2 TIM functions are active and one of them is overridden, the TIM status  flashes.

If only one TIM function is active and is overridden, the TIM status switches to 

„ To restore the connection, press the key 

TIM

.

12.10.4

Pausing TIM functions

If TIM is not to be used for the time being, TIM can be paused. In doing so, registration and authentication are retained between tractor and machine.

ü The TIM status on the working screen is on  .

„ Press

TIM

.

Æ The TIM functions are paused and must be operated manually via the tractor control units.

The TIM status switches to  .

„

To reactivate the TIM functions, refer to page 120

.

It is also possible to deactivate only the individual TIM function "Opening and closing tailgate at the end of the tying cycle", e.g. if the machine is in an unfavourable position for ejecting the round bale.

„ To deactivate the TIM function "Opening and closing tailgate at the end of the tying cycle", select the checkbox by checking   next to the icon .

Æ The checkbox is empty  and the TIM function has been deactivated.

Æ In addition the key  appears on the display in order to be able to start tailgate opening and bale ejection manually.

12.11

Operating machine via joystick

12.11.1

Auxiliary functions (AUX)

There are terminals which support the additional function “Auxiliary” (AUX). By means of this function, programmable keys of peripheral equipment (e.g. joystick) can be assigned with functions of the connected job computers. A programmable key can be assigned with several different functions. If key assignments are saved, the display shows corresponding menus when switching on the terminal.

The following functions are available in the “Auxiliary” (AUX) menu:

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 121

12 Terminal machine functions

12.11 Operating machine via joystick

Icon Explanation

Start tying

Select type of operation for tying: Automatic or manual mode

Increasing bale diameter

Reducing bale diameter

12.11.2

Auxiliary assignment of a joystick

INFORMATION

If a joystick on the tractor side is to be configured with functions from the operating terminal, the joystick must feature AUX functionalities.

For further information, see the operating instructions for the terminal and tractor used.

INFORMATION

The examples below represent a recommendation. The assignment of the joystick can be adapted to own desires.

For further information, please refer to the operating instructions of the used terminal.

Recommended configuration of a WTK joystick

122

EQG003-040

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal machine functions 12

Operating machine via joystick 12.11

The keys on the WTK joystick can be assigned on 2 levels.

„ Change between the levels using the switch (2).

Æ The LED (1) is lit green or red.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 123

13 Terminal menus

13.1

Menu Structure

13 Terminal menus

13.1

Menu Structure

The menu structure is divided into the following menus depending on the machine configuration.

Menu

1

Sub-menu Designation

Number of net layers, refer to page 130

n

1 n

Number of film layers

(for version with "Net wrapping and chamber film wrapping"),

refer to page 130

3

Pre-signalling, refer to page 131

4 Tying start delay for net wrapping,

refer to page 131

9

+

-

10

11

13

4

6

8

13-1

∑ n

Tying start delay for chamber film wrapping

(for version with "Net wrapping and chamber film wrapping"),

refer to page 132

Electronic baling pressure adjustment

(for "Electronic baling pressure adjustment" version),

refer to page 133

Selection type of tying

(for version with "Net wrapping and chamber film wrapping"),

refer to page 134

Filling correction, refer to page 135

Manual operation, refer to page 136

Central lubrication, refer to page 138

Counter,

refer to page 139

Customer counter, refer to page 140

124

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Menu

14

15

15-1

15-2

15-3

Sub-menu

13-2

∑ all

Designation

Total counter,

refer to page 142

Terminal menus 13

Recurring icons 13.2

ISOBUS,

refer to page 143

14-6

TIM

14-9

Configure TIM software, refer to page 144

Switching between terminals, refer to page 146

Settings, refer to page 147

Sensor test, refer to page 147

Actuator test, refer to page 151

Software information,

refer to page 154

13.2

Recurring icons

To navigate in the menu level/menus, the following icons appear again and again.

Icon Designation

Up arrow

Explanation

Move up to select something.

Down arrow

Right arrow

Left arrow

Disk

Move down to select something.

Move right to select something.

Move left to select something.

Save the setting.

ESC Leave the menu without saving.

By pressing the key a little longer, the previously viewed working screen is selected.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 125

13 Terminal menus

13.3

Selecting a menu Level

Icon Designation

DEF

Sensor test

Actuator test

Disk

Plus

Minus

Right arrow

Left arrow

Explanation

Reset to factory setting.

Quick access to the sensor test of the sensors responsible for this menu.

Quick access to the actuator test of the actuators responsible for this menu.

The mode or value is saved.

Increase the value.

Reduce the value.

Display next mode.

Display previous mode.

13.3

13.4

Selecting a menu Level

„ To bring up the menu level from the working screen, press

Æ The display indicates the menu level.

Return from the menu pages to the main menu:

„ Keep pressing until the main menu appears.

For an overview of the menus: refer to page 124

.

.

Selecting a menu

Calling up menu

The menus are selected depending on used terminal (touch sensitive or not touch sensitive).

126

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

13.5

Terminal menus 13

Changing value 13.5

For version with “Touch sensitive and not touch sensitive terminal”

By means of adjacent keys

„ To select a menu, press the keys next to

ð The selected menu is highlighted in colour.

or until the desired menu is selected.

„ To call up the menu, press the key next to .

Æ The menu opens.

INFORMATION

When equipped with “touch sensitive terminal”, the icons can directly be pressed.

By means of the scroll wheel

„ Select the desired menu by means of scroll wheel.

ð The selected menu is highlighted in colour.

„ To call up the menu, press the scroll wheel.

Æ The menu opens.

For version with touch sensitive terminal

By pressing the icons

„ To call up a menu, press the icon (e.g.

Æ The menu opens.

Leaving menu

„ Press or adjacent key.

Æ The menu closes.

) in the display.

Changing value

For the settings in the menus, values must be entered or changed. The values are selected depending on used terminal (touch sensitive or not touch sensitive).

For version with touch sensitive or not touch sensitive terminal

• By means of the scroll wheel

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 127

13 Terminal menus

13.6

Changing mode

Additionally for “Touch sensitive terminal” version

• By pressing or .

• By tipping the blue value on the display.

If a numeric value is tipped, an input mask opens. For further information on entering values in the input mask, refer to the enclosed operating instructions of the terminal.

Examples:

13.6

By means of the scroll wheel

„ Choose the desired value by using the scroll wheel.

ð The value is highlighted in colour.

„ Press the scroll wheel.

ð An input mask opens.

„ Turn the scroll wheel to increase or reduce the value.

„ Press scroll wheel to save the value.

Æ The setting is saved and the input mask closes.

Using the value

„ Tip the value.

ð An input mask opens.

„ Increase or reduce value.

„ Press to save the value.

Æ The setting is saved and the input mask closes.

Changing mode

It is possible to select between different modes in individual menus.

„ To select the next mode, press .

„ To select the previous mode, press .

„ To save, press .

Æ An acoustic signal sounds, the set mode is saved and the the upper line.

icon is briefly displayed in

„ To leave the menu, press .

128

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

13.7

Tying in the menu level

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

For the “Net wrapping” version n

-

+

Terminal menus 13

Tying in the menu level 13.7

EQG003-008

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version n

2

1

-

+ 3

EQG003-043

Depending on the equipment of the machine, the menu items (1), (2) and (3) for tying in the menu level may look different.

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

Pos.

1

2

3

Icon n n

Explanation

Number of net layers (if ‘net’ has been selected as the type of tying under (3))

Number of film layers (if ‘film’ has been selected as the type of tying under (3))

Tying start delay net wrapping (if ‘net’ has been selected as the type of tying under (3))

Tying start delay chamber film wrapping (if ‘film’ has been selected as the type of tying under (3))

Select type of tying (net or film)

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 129

13 Terminal menus

13.8

Menu 1 “Number of net layers” (net wrapping)

13.8

Menu 1 “Number of net layers” (net wrapping)

1 n n

5,0

-

+

13.9

1,5

2.5

EQG003-000

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

ü For the “Net and chamber film wrapping” version: Net wrapping is selected in menu 8 “Type of tying”,

refer to page 135 .

„ To open the menu, press n

.

Æ The display shows menu “Number of net layers”.

Adjusting the number of net layers

„

Increase or decrease the value, refer to page 127

.

„ To save the value, press .

Menu 1 “Number of film layers” (chamber film wrapping)

1 n n

+

-

8,0

1,5

3.5

EQG003-001

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

ü Chamber film wrapping is selected in menu 8 “Type of tying”,

refer to page 135 .

„ To open the menu, press n

.

Æ The display shows menu "Number of film layers".

130

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal menus 13

Menu 3 “Advance signalling” 13.10

Adjusting the number of film layers

„

Increase or decrease the value, refer to page 127

.

„ To save the value, press .

INFORMATION

KRONE recommends 3.5 – 4 film layers for optimum chamber film wrapping. The minimum required film layers depend on the condition of the crops.

With round bales whose diameter measures more than 130 cm and/or very dry or very wet crops, KRONE recommends at least one additional film layer.

13.10

Menu 3 “Advance signalling”

Pre-signalling is used to warn if the round bale in the bale chamber is near completion. On the terminal you can set the filling for which pre-signalling starts.

The maximum value depends on which baling pressure was set beforehand, refer to page 163 .

If e.g. a baling pressure of 100 % was set, the maximum value of the pre-signalling is 90 %.

3 n

25

-

+

0

5 cm

EQG003-002

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows menu “Advance signalling”.

Setting advance signalling

„

Increase or decrease the value, refer to page 127

.

„ To save the value, press .

13.11

Menu 4 “Tying start delay” (net wrapping)

Tying start delay is used to set the period of time which is required between completion of round bale in the bale chamber and triggering the tying cycle. The tying start delay is set in seconds.

Setting range: 0.0–2.5 s

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 131

13 Terminal menus

13.12 Menu 4 “Tying start delay” (chamber film wrapping) n

4

2,5

-

+

0,0

0.0

s

EQG003-003

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

ü For the “Net and chamber film wrapping” version: Net wrapping is selected in menu 8 “Type of tying”,

refer to page 135 .

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows menu “Tying start delay”.

Adjusting the tying start delay

„

Increase or decrease the value, refer to page 127

.

„ To save the value, press .

13.12

Menu 4 “Tying start delay” (chamber film wrapping)

Tying start delay is used to set the period of time which is required between completion of round bale in the bale chamber and triggering the tying cycle. The tying start delay is set in seconds.

Setting range: 0.0–2.5 s

4 n

+

-

2,5

0,0

0.0

s

EQG003-004

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

ü Chamber film wrapping is selected in menu 8 “Type of tying”,

refer to page 135 .

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows menu “Tying start delay”.

132

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal menus 13

Menu 6 "Electronic baling pressure adjustment" 13.13

Special feature of chamber film wrapping

The tying start delay is automatically set to 0.0 s for chamber film wrapping. KRONE recommends this setting.

At high driving speeds, the tying start delay can be set to a minimum for chamber film wrapping:

„

Increase or decrease the value, refer to page 127

.

„ To save the value, press .

13.13

Menu 6 "Electronic baling pressure adjustment"

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to baling pressure set too low or too high

The machine may be damaged if the baling pressure is above 190 bar or below 50 bar.

„ Do not operate the machine if the baling pressure is too low or too high.

6 n

100

-

+

0

50 %

EQG003-016

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the menu "Electronic baling pressure adjustment".

Setting the baling pressure

„

Increase or decrease the value, refer to page 127

.

„ To save the value, press .

Releasing the baling pressure

The baling pressure can be released for maintenance work at the baling belts or in the bale chamber.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 133

13 Terminal menus

13.14 Menu 7 “Sensitivity of direction display”

Before starting baling work, the bale formation conveyors must be moved into the working position and hydraulically clamped. After finishing baling work, the bale formation conveyors must be moved for protection back into the parking position and declamped.

„ Press and keep it pressed for several seconds.

Æ The baling pressure is released and the status is displayed on the key: .

„ To build up the baling pressure, press and keep it pressed for several seconds.

„ In order to obtain the baling pressure last set, completely open and close the tailgate once using the control unit (red, 1+).

Approximate values for setting the baling pressure

Percentage setting

100 %

0 %

Baling pressure approx. 180 ± 10 bar approx. 60 ± 5 bar

13.14

Menu 7 “Sensitivity of direction display”

This menu is used to set the sensitivity of the direction display.

The direction display indicates whether the swath is picked up in the centre by the pick-up and provides information about the required direction of travel. The higher the bar on the display, the more sensitive the direction display is set. The higher the sensitivity of the direction display is set, the stronger the motion indication appears in the form of arrows on the working screen.

How the bale chamber is optimally filled by the pick-up, refer to page 69

.

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows menu “Sensitivity of direction display”.

Adjusting the sensitivity of the direction display

„

Increase or decrease the value, refer to page 127

.

„ To save the value, press .

13.15

Menu 8 “Type of tying” (for the “Net and chamber film wrapping” version)

The desired tying method is switched to in this menu. After this, only tying functions for this selected tying method can be operated in the terminal.

134

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal menus 13

Menu 9 “Filling correction” 13.16

8 n

-

+

1/2

EQG003-005

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows menu “Type of tying”.

Changing the mode

„ Select and save the mode,

refer to page 128 .

The following modes can be selected:

Icon Explanation

Net wrapping

Chamber film wrapping

13.16

Menu 9 “Filling correction”

If the bale diameter is not reached or is too high, the filling correction can be used to correct the bale diameter within a pre-defined range (bale size -10 to +10 cm).

9 n

+

-

10

-

+

-10

0 cm

EQG003-018

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, press

+

.

Æ The display shows menu “Filling correction”.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 135

13 Terminal menus

13.17 Menu 10 "Manual operation" (for the "Net wrapping" version)

Adjusting the filling correction

„

Increase or decrease the value, refer to page 127

.

„ To save the value, press .

Example

The set target bale diameter is 108 cm.

If the actual bale diameter is only 100 cm and thus 8 cm too small, a correction value of + 8 cm must be set.

This means:

Correction value=target bale diameter - bale diameter

13.17

Menu 10 "Manual operation" (for the "Net wrapping" version)

10 n

-

+

136

EQG003-006

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, select .

Æ The display shows menu “Manual operation”.

The following status displays may appear on the display:

Icon Explanation

Net motor is in feed position.

Net motor is in the tying position.

Net motor is in cutting position.

The position is not defined.

Use the keys on the sides to operate the following functions:

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Icon

Terminal menus 13

Menu 10 “Manual operation” (for the “Net and chamber film wrapping” version) 13.18

Explanation

Move actuator for wrapping process to feed position

Move actuator for wrapping process into tying position

Move actuator for wrapping process into cutting position

Move actuator for wrapping process

„ To move the actuator for wrapping process into the feed position, press .

„ To move the tying actuator to the tying position, press .

„ To move the actuator for wrapping process into the cutting position, press .

13.18

Menu 10 “Manual operation” (for the “Net and chamber film wrapping” version)

10 n

-

+

EQG003-007

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows menu “Manual operation”.

The following status displays may appear on the display:

Icon Explanation

Actuator for wrapping process (net/film) is in feed position.

Actuator for wrapping process (net/film) is in the tying position.

Actuator for wrapping process (net/film) is in cutting position.

The position is not defined.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 137

13 Terminal menus

13.19 Menu 11 "Central lubrication"

Use the keys on the sides of the terminal to operate the following functions:

Icon Explanation

Move actuator for wrapping process (net/film) to feed position

Move actuator for wrapping process (net/film) into tying position

Move actuator for wrapping process (net/film) into cutting position

Move actuator for wrapping process

„ To move the actuator for wrapping process into the feed position, press or .

„ To move the actuator for wrapping process into the tying position, press or .

„ To move the actuator for wrapping process into the cutting position, press or .

13.19

Menu 11 "Central lubrication"

This menu can be used to manually actuate an intermediate lubrication.

11 n

-

+

15 min

5 min

EQG003-113

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Central lubrication" menu.

The displays have the following meaning:

Icon Designation

Lubrication duration

Explanation

• Not adjustable

• Factory setting: 15 min

Lubrication pause • Not adjustable

• Factory setting: 5 min

138

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal menus 13

Menu 13 "Counters" 13.20

Actuating intermediate lubrication

„ Press .

A lubrication cycle is triggered manually whilst the automatic lubrication cycle is paused.

13.20

Menu 13 "Counters"

n ∑ n

∑ all

-

+

EQG003-011

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Counter" menu.

The "Counter" menu is divided into the following submenus:

Menu

13

Sub-menu Designation

Counter,

refer to page 139

13-1

∑ n

13-2

∑ all

Customer counter, refer to page 140

Total counter,

refer to page 142

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 139

13 Terminal menus

13.20 Menu 13 "Counters"

13.20.1

Menu 13-1 “Customer counter”

∑ n

∑ all

13-1

∑ n

1

2

NAME 01

NAME 02

3

NAME 03

4

NAME 04

5

NAME 05

EQ003-054 / EQ003-228

ü

Menu 13 “Counter” is called.“ refer to page 139 .

„ To open the menu, press ∑ n

.

Æ The display shows menu 13-1 “Customer counter”.

The menu displays a customer list. The names shown in blue can be adjusted,

refer to page 127 .

„ Navigate through the customer list using  or  .

„ To activate a customer counter, navigate to the required customer and press 

Æ The required customer counter is highlighted in grey.

.

„ To open the detailed view of a customer, navigate to the required customer and press  .

Detailed view of a customer

13-1

∑ n

NAME 03

3

0

0,0 h

EQG003-106

The icons displayed in the menu have the following meaning:

140

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Icon

1

Terminal menus 13

Menu 13 "Counters" 13.20

Explanation

Customer counters 1-20 (the active customer counter is highlighted in grey)

Total of pressed round bales for the respective customer

Operating hours counter for the respective customer h

Use the keys on the sides of the terminal to operate the following functions:

Icon Explanation

Increase number of bales

Reduce number of bales

Setting displayed customer counter to zero

Navigating between the detailed views of the customers

Activating displayed customer counter

Returning to the complete overview of all customers

Changing the number of bales

The number of bales can be manually changed in the customer counter. The particular customer counter does not have to be activated for this.

„ To increase the number of bales, press .

„ To reduce the number of bales, press .

Setting customer counters to zero

„ To set the customer counter to zero, hold down for at least 2 seconds.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 141

13 Terminal menus

13.20 Menu 13 "Counters"

13.20.2

Menu 13-2 "Total counter"

∑ n

∑ all

13-2

∑ all

∑

1

0

0

0

2

EQG003-013

ü

Menu 13 “Counter” is called.“ refer to page 139 .

„ To open the menu, press ∑ all

.

Æ The display shows menu 13-2 “Total counters”.

The icons that appear in the working screen have the following meaning:

Icon Explanation

Total counter (cannot be deleted)

1

Season counter 1 (can be deleted)

Season counter 2 (can be deleted)

2

Total of pressed round bales

0

0

0 h

Operating hours counter h

The keys on the sides of the terminal can be used to control the following functions:

Icon Explanation

Set season counter 1 to zero

1

Set season counter 2 to zero

2

Setting season counter 1 or 2 to zero

„ To set season counter 1 to zero, press

1

.

„ To set season counter 2 to zero, press 2 .

1

2

142

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

13.21

Menu 14 "ISOBUS"

n

-

+

Terminal menus 13

Menu 14 "ISOBUS" 13.21

TIM

EQG003-014

ü The menu level has been selected,

refer to page 126 .

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "ISOBUS" menu.

Depending on the machine equipment, the "ISOBUS" menu is divided into the following submenus:

Menu

14

Sub-menu Designation

ISOBUS,

refer to page 143

Configure TIM software, refer to page 144

14-6

TIM

14-9

Switching between terminals, refer to page 146

13.21.1

Menu 14-5 "KRONE SmartConnect"

The access data for the KRONE SmartConnect (KSC) can be seen in this menu.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 143

13 Terminal menus

13.21 Menu 14 "ISOBUS"

TIM

14-5

WLAN-NAME:

00011501

WLAN-KEY: afbb2bfac5

PRODUCT-CODE:

C0060000600011501

EQG000-064

ü One or more KRONE SmartConnects have been installed.

ü

The menu 14 “ISOBUS” has been selected, refer to page 143 .

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "SmartConnect" menu.

13.21.2

Menu 14-6 "Configuring TIM software" (for "TIM 1.0" version)

14-5

TIM

TIM

STOP

Brand:

Model:

Function Instance:

EQG003-015

ü

The menu 14 “ISOBUS” has been selected, refer to page 143 .

0

„ Select

TIM

to open the menu.

Æ The display shows the "Configuring TIM Software" menu.

The following displays are in the menu:

Icon

STOP

Explanation

TIM function "Stop tractor when the tying cycle starts".

Brand:

Model:

Function Instance:

TIM function "Opening and closing tailgate at the end of the tying cycle".

Control unit number of the tractor which is used to open and close the tailgate.

When a tractor has logged into the ISOBUS system, the designations and the type of tractor appear here.

TIM

TIM

TIM

144

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal menus 13

Menu 14 "ISOBUS" 13.21

The keys can be used to operate the following functions. If the key is greyed out, the function is not available.

Icon Explanation

The tractor is not connected to the machine via TIM. If TIM

TIM functions have been selected, the key switches to

TIM

Start registration and authentication of the TIM functions.

.

TIM TIM

TIM

TIM

TIM

TIM

TIM

TIM

Start TIM functions (can be selected only when tailgate closed).

Stop TIM functions. In doing so, registration and authentication are also disconnected between tractor and machine.

Pause TIM functions. In doing so, registration and authentication are not disconnected between tractor and machine.

Selecting TIM functions

„ Select the checkbox

STOP

next to the icon and/or .

„ Select

and input the control unit number of the tractor, refer to page 127

.

„ To start establishing a connection between tractor and machine, press

TIM

.

Æ Registration and authentication of the TIM functions are started.

Connecting machine and tractor to each other

14-6

TIM

TIM

TIM

STOP

TIM

1

Brand: AGCO-FENDT

Model: 530.970.070.010

Function Instance: 0

EQG003-095

When the TIM functions have been preselected, the checkboxes disappear and the TIM status  with the tractor.

is indicated on the display. The machine is being registered and authenticated

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 145

13 Terminal menus

13.21 Menu 14 "ISOBUS"

The TIM status switches to  .

„ To activate TIM on the machine, press the key 

TIM

.

Æ The TIM status switches to  . The machine waits for confirmation of the tractor.

„ Confirm the TIM activation on the terminal or on another control panel on the tractor.

Æ The TIM status switches to  . The machine automatically takes over control of the

TIM functions on the tractor,

refer to page 118

.

13.21.3

Menu 14-9 "Switching between terminals"

INFORMATION

This menu is only available if several ISOBUS terminals are connected.

When the user switches terminals for the first time, the configuration of the machine is loaded into the next terminal. The loading process can take a few minutes. The configuration is stored in the memory of the next terminal.

Up to the next call, the machine is no longer available in the previous terminal.

When restarting, the system makes attempts to start the last used terminal. If the last used terminal is no longer available (e.g. because it was dismounted), the restart is delayed as the system searches for a new terminal and loads the specific menus into the terminal. The loading process can take a few minutes.

TIM

EQG003-035

ü

The menu 14 “ISOBUS” has been selected, refer to page 143 .

„ To change to the next terminal, press .

146

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal menus 13

Menu 15 "Settings" 13.22

13.22

Menu 15 "Settings"

n

-

+

EQG003-036

ü For The menu level is active,

refer to page 126

.

„ To open the menu, select .

Æ The display shows the "Settings" menu.

The "Settings" menu is divided into the following submenus:

Menu

15

Sub-menu Designation

Settings, refer to page 147

15-1

Sensor test, refer to page 147

15-2

15-3

Actuator test, refer to page 151

Software information,

refer to page 154

13.22.1

Menu 15-1 "Sensor test"

WARNING

Danger of injury in the danger zone of the machine

If the PTO shaft runs during the sensor test, machine parts may start to move unintentionally.

Thus there is a risk of serious injuries or death.

„ Turn off PTO shaft.

In the sensor test, the sensors installed on the machine are checked for faults. Furthermore the sensors can be correctly set in the sensor test. There is no guarantee the machine is working correctly until after the sensors have been adjusted.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 147

13 Terminal menus

13.22 Menu 15 "Settings"

13-1

B01

B02

EQG003-030

ü

Menu 15 “Settings” is called, refer to page 147 .

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Sensor test" menu .

Icon Designation

Select previous sensor

Select next sensor state:

1

8,3V

7,3V

5,2V

2,4V

7,9V

Explanation

Exit menu

Setting values

The minimum and maximum setting value with attenuated sensor (metal in front of the sensor) are shown in the upper part of the bar display. The current setting value (actual value) is displayed under the bar display.

The distance from the sensor to the metal must be adjusted so that in the attenuated state the bar is in the upper marking. Then check whether the bar is in unattenuated state in the lower marked area.

Possible sensors (depending on the machine configuration)

An overview of the sensors, actuators and control units is in the circuit diagram.

No.

Sensor

B01 B01

Designation

Speed of bale chamber

B02 B02

B05 B05

Tying process active

Slip floor conveyor

B08 B08

B09 B09

L

Blade cassette up

Filling display left

148

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

No.

Sensor

B10 B10

R

B11 B11 L

B12 B12 R

B40 B40 B

OFF

B41 B41 B

ON

B42 B42

A

OFF

B43 B43

A

ON

B61 B61

M1

Terminal menus 13

Menu 15 "Settings" 13.22

Designation

Filling display right

Lock hook bale chamber left

Lock hook bale chamber right

Blade group B swivelled out (for the “Hydraulic blade group control system” version)

Blade group B swivelled in (for the “Hydraulic blade group control system” version)

Blade group A swivelled out (for the “Hydraulic blade group control system” version)

Blade group A swivelled in (for the “Hydraulic blade group control system” version)

Tying 1 (passive)

Possible status displays of the sensors

Icon Designation

Sensor ready for operation

0

Sensor attenuated (metal in front of the sensor)

1

Sensor unattenuated (no metal in front of the sensor)

2

Cable break or short circuit

7

Defective sensor or job computer

8

20 Cable break

Short circuit

21

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 149

13 Terminal menus

13.22 Menu 15 "Settings"

13.22.1.1

Adjusting sensor B08 “Top blade cassette”

RP000-053

15-1

B05 state: 1

5,0V

B08

1,5V

B09

L

1,0V

2,4V 2,4V

EQ003-113

Sensor B08 “Blade cassette up” (3) is located on the left side of the machine in the bottom part.

The green bar in menu 15-1 “Sensor test” shows the saved value. The black bar shows the current value of the sensor. As soon as a new value is saved, the green bar is adjusted to the black one.

ü The blade cassette (2) is flush with the cutting unit housing (1).

„ Remove contamination in the area of the blade cassette (2) and the cutting unit housing (1).

„ Adjust sensor B08 “Blade cassette up” (3) in menu 15-1 “Sensor test”,

refer to page 147 .

13.22.1.2

Adjusting sensor B09/B10 “Filling display left/right”

15-1

B08 state:

1

3

EQG003-042

The sensor (3) is located behind the side hood:

• B09 on the left side of the machine

• B10 on the right side of the machine

B09

L

B10

R

2,4V

1,9V

1,9V 3,2V

1

2

150

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal menus 13

Menu 15 "Settings" 13.22

The green bar in menu 15-1 “Sensor test” shows the saved value. The black bar shows the current value of the sensor. As soon as a new value is saved, the green bar is adjusted to the black one.

ü The bale chamber is closed and empty.

ü The density of the bale core has been set to Position III – "Low density of the bale core",

refer to page 163

.

ü Menu 15-1 “Sensor test” is open.

ü Sensor B09 or B10 has been selected.

If the bar (2) is not inside the rectangle (1) when the bale chamber is closed and empty, adjust the sensor B09 or B10 mechanically:

„ Loosen the screw connections of the sensor and move them in the oblong hole until the bar (2) on the display is inside the rectangle (1) of the bargraph.

ð An acoustic signal sounds when the bar (2) is inside the rectangle (1).

„ Tighten the screw connections of the sensor.

„ Press .

Æ The set position is saved.

INFORMATION

Saving is only possible if the bar (2) is inside the rectangle (1) of the bargraph.

13.22.1.3

Adjusting sensor B61 “Tying 1 (passive)”

15-1

B61

1

M1

5,0V

3,5V

2,5V

1,0V

2,4V 2,4V 3,5V

EQ003-106

ü Menu 15-1 “Sensor test” is open.

ü The sensor B61 "Tying 1 (passive)" has been selected.

Saving is only possible when the bar is in the lower or upper rectangle of the bargraph.

To set the feed and end positions, refer to page 166

.

13.22.2

Menu 15-2 "Actuator test"

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of the safety routines

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 27

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 151

13 Terminal menus

13.22 Menu 15 "Settings"

The actuator test is used to test the actuators installed on the machine. An actuator can only be tested when current is flowing through it. Therefore, in the "Actuator test" menu, the actuator must be controlled manually for a short time in order to determine possible errors in the actuator system.

15-2

152

K01

K03 state: 2

EQG003-031

ü

Menu 15 “Settings” is called, refer to page 147 .

„ To open the menu, press .

ð A warning opens which refers to the operating instructions.

„

Observe the safety routine "Run actuator test", refer to page 28

.

„ Confirm with .

Æ The display shows the "Actuator test" menu.

Possible actuators (depending on how the machine is equipped)

An overview of the sensors, actuators and control units is in the circuit diagram.

No.

K01

Actuator

K01

Designation

Pick-up

K03 K03

K20 K20

B

K21 K21

A

K55 K55

E10 E10

E20 E20

E20/

E21

E20/E21

Raising/lowering blade cassette

Blade group B (for the “Hydraulic blade group control system” version)

Blade group A (for the “Hydraulic blade group control system” version)

Central lubrication

Warning beacon (for certain countries)

Working lights net roll (for the “Working lights” version)

Working lights net roll (for version "Net wrapping and chamber film wrapping” and "Working lights")

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

No.

E21

Actuator

E21

E22/

E23

M01

Q26

E22/E23

M01

M1

Q26

Q27 Q27

Q30 Q30

Q75 Q75

Q76 Q76

Terminal menus 13

Menu 15 "Settings" 13.22

Designation

Working lights chamber film wrapping (for the “Net and chamber film wrapping” version)

Maintenance lighting side hood left/right

Motor tying 1 (passive)

Lowering the feed rocker arm

Lifting the feed rocker arm

Baling pressure (for the “Electronic baling pressure adjustment” version)

Bale lifter speed

Bale lifter direction of motion

Possible status displays of the actuators

Icon Designation

Actuator ON

1

Actuator OFF

2

General actuator error

3

4

No supply voltage

Possible cause: Fuse defective.

Diagnostics for digital actuators

15-2

K01

K03 state: 2

EQG000-019

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 153

13 Terminal menus

13.22 Menu 15 "Settings"

Errors are only displayed if the actuator is turned on and a test for the actuator in question is available. The LED on the plug can also be checked directly on the actuator.

„ Press to switch the actuator on.

„ Press to switch the actuator off.

Diagnostics of actuator for wrapping process

The actuator for wrapping process M01 can be tested by moving it into the feed or cutting position.

„ To move the actuator for wrapping process into the feed position, press .

„ To move the actuator for wrapping process into the cutting position, press .

13.22.3

Menu 15-3 "Software info"

15-3

KRONE

SW: D2515020117900011 500

EQG000-016

ü

Menu 15 “Settings” is called, refer to page 147 .

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows the "Software info" menu.

Display area

Icon

SW

Designation

Total software version of the machine

13.22.4

Menu 15-4 "Error list"

All active and non-active errors are shown in this menu. The errors are shown with a number indicating how often the error occurred and the time on the operating hours counter when the error last occurred.

154

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Terminal menus 13

Menu 15 "Settings" 13.22

15-4

KMC - 520192- 19

CAN1 x 1

1475 min

EQG000-060

ü

Menu 15 “Settings” is called, refer to page 147 .

„ To open the menu, press .

Æ The display shows menu "Error list".

Display area

Icon

KMC - 520192- 19

CAN1 x 1

1475 min

KMC - 520192- 19

CAN1 x 1

1475 min

(1)

Designation

Active error

Non-active error

Explanation

• Cannot be deleted

• Can be deleted

(2)

(3)

ALL

Error number

Number

Operating hours counter time

Delete individual errors

Delete all errors

• Meaning, cause and remedy of error

message refer to page 232

.

• How often the error has occurred.

• The time on the operating hours counter when the error last occurred.

• The selected error is deleted, refer to page 155 .

• Only non-active errors can be deleted.

• All non-active errors are deleted,

refer to page 156 .

Recurring icons refer to page 125 .

Delete individual errors

Only non-active errors (highlighted grey) can be deleted.

„ To select the error to be deleted, press or .

„ To delete the error, press .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 155

13 Terminal menus

13.22 Menu 15 "Settings"

Delete all errors

Only non-active errors (highlighted grey) can be deleted.

„ To delete all errors, press

ALL

.

156

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

14

Driving and transport 14

Driving and transport

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, refer to page 15 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 27

.

WARNING

Risk of accident from open stop cocks

Machine components could be moved unintentionally when stop cocks are open. This may result in serious accidents.

„ In order to avoid that functions are triggered by mistake, the stop cock/s must be closed during transport/road travel.

WARNING

Risk of accident when cornering with a hitched machine

When cornering, the hitched machine swings out further than the tractor. This may result in accidents.

„ Consider the larger swivel range.

„ Consider people, oncoming traffic and obstacles when turning.

WARNING

Risk of accident caused by non-locked regulating valves of tractor

When regulating valves are not locked, machine components could be activated unintentionally. This may result in serious accidents.

„ To avoid that functions are triggered by mistake, the regulating valves of the tractor must be in neutral position when performing transport journeys on the road and must be locked.

WARNING

Risk of accident due to inadequate brake force

If the brake force controller has been incorrectly set, there is a risk of accidents.

„ When driving on public roads, ensure that full load (1/1) is set on the brake force regulator.

„ When working for example on wet fields, deceleration may be reduced.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 157

14 Driving and transport

14.1

Preparing the machine for road travel

14.1

Preparing the machine for road travel

ü The machine is completely and correctly hitched to the tractor,

refer to page 55 .

ü The control units on the tractor are in neutral position and locked.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü All the guards are closed and locked.

ü The wheel chocks are secured in the supports / holders on the machine,

refer to page 77 .

ü

The support jack is in the transport position, refer to page 73

.

ü The road lighting has been connected, tested and is functioning properly,

refer to page 66 .

ü The pick-up is fully raised in transport position,

refer to page 79

.

ü The bale chamber is empty and the tailgate is closed.

ü Soiling and crop residue have been removed from the machine, in particular from the lighting and identification elements.

ü The tyres have no cuts and breaks.

ü The tyre pressure is correct,

refer to page 43 .

ü The brake is functioning properly.

ü For version with "Single axle with compressed air brake" or "Tandem axle with compressed air brake" : The brake force regulator has been set to full load (1/1),

refer to page 79

.

ü The retaining rod in the storage compartment has been mounted and secures net or film rolls in the compartment.

ü The permitted maximum speed of the machine is known and is maintained.

ü The road travel screen is open,

refer to page 115

.

14.2

14.3

Parking the machine

„ Before uncoupling the machine from the tractor, completely close the tailgate.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„

Bring the support jack in support position, refer to page 73

.

„ On the tractor side, remove the supporting chain from the universal shaft, disconnect the universal shaft and place it in the universal shaft chain.

„ When using a safety chain as an additional safety precaution for trailed implements:

Remove the safety chain.

„ Disconnect the road lighting plug,

refer to page 66 .

„ Remove the power supply cable for the terminal.

„ Disconnect the hydraulic hose lines and hook them into the support at the machine.

„ Fit the safety device which prevents unauthorised use and keep the key in a safe place,

refer to page 78 .

„ Drive the tractor away carefully.

Securing the universal shaft

If the universal shaft is not connected to the tractor, it must be secured on the drawbar with the universal shaft retaining chain or with the universal shaft bracket.

158

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Driving and transport 14

Checking road travel lighting 14.4

With top suspension of the drawbar

1

1

2

RPG000-118

„ Insert the universal shaft (2) into the universal shaft chain (1).

„ Attach the universal shaft chain (1) to the support (3).

With bottom suspension of the drawbar

3

1

2

14.4

RPG000-137

„ Fold out the universal shaft bracket (1) and place the universal shaft (2) on the universal shaft bracket (1).

Checking road travel lighting

2 2

1

RPG000-073

„

Connecting road travel lighting to the vehicle electrical system, refer to page 66

.

„ Check whether the rear lamps (1) are functional.

„ Clean the rear lamps (1) and the side reflectors (2).

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 159

14 Driving and transport

14.5

Preparing the machine for shipment

1

14.5

RPG000-074

The 2 reflectors (1) are located on the rear of the rear lamps.

„ Clean the reflectors (1).

Preparing the machine for shipment

WARNING

Risk of accident due to unsecured machine parts

If the machine is not secured properly for transportation on a lorry or train, the parts may come loose unintentionally due to the airstream. This may result in serious accidents or damage to the machine.

„ Carry out the following measures to secure moving machine parts.

14.5.1

Securing the side hoods

1

2

3

4

RPG000-070

Make the following setting on the right and left sides of the machine:

„ Open the side hood (1).

„ Guide a cable tie (2) through the openings of the flap lock (3).

„ Carefully close the side hood (1).

„ Lay the cable tie (2) around the lock holder (4) and tighten it.

160

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

14.5.2

Securing the storage compartment flap

Driving and transport 14

Preparing the machine for shipment 14.5

1

2

2

3

14.5.3

RP000-367

„ To secure the storage compartment flap (1), place a strap (2) around the storage compartment flap (1) and the protective tube (3) and tighten.

Securing the guide wheels of the pick-up

1 2 3

14.5.4

4

RP000-692

Make the following setting on the right and left sides of the machine in the same way:

„ Fix the guide wheel (4) in the uppermost position.

„ To secure the guide wheel (4), feed a cable tie (2) through the last hooked in chain link (1) and place it around the guide wheel holder (3) and tighten.

Lifting the machine

WARNING

Risk of injury due to raised machine

There is a risk to individuals from the machine falling and parts which are swinging in an uncontrolled manner.

„ Use only permitted hoists and slings with a sufficient load-bearing capacity. For the weights, see type plate of the machine.

„ Note the information on the suspension points provided.

„ Make sure the lifting means are properly secured.

„ Never stay under the suspended machine.

„

If work has to be performed under the machine, securely support the machine, refer to page 27 .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 161

14 Driving and transport

14.5

Preparing the machine for shipment

The machine is equipped with 3 suspension points:

• 1 suspension point is located in the front area of the drawbar.

• 2 suspension points can be found at the rear on the yoke (right and left upper machine side).

To lift the machine, a hoist must be used which has a minimum load bearing capacity

depending on the permitted total weight of the machine, see type plate on the machine, refer to page 39

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Close the tailgate.

„

Lift the pick-up into the transport position, refer to page 79

.

„ Ensure that all safety devices are locked.

„ Attach the chains of the hoist to the suspension points on the machine.

„ Ensure that the chain hooks have been correctly attached to the suspension points.

„ Tension the chains so that the support jack is relieved.

„ Move the support jack into transport position,

refer to page 73

.

162

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

15

15.1

15.2

15.3

Settings 15

Setting the baling pressure 15.1

Settings

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, refer to page 15 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 27

.

Setting the baling pressure

„ Set the baling pressure via the terminal in the menu "Electronic baling pressure adjustment"  ,

refer to page 133 .

Setting the bale diameter

„

Set the bale diameter via the bar on the terminal, refer to page 116 .

Setting the density of the bale core

The bale core density can be adjusted to differently structured crops by setting the double rocker arm. Then check again whether the spring of the bale formation conveyor tension has been correctly set.

Setting the double rocker arm

1

2 3

RPG000-095

If the lower stop (3) of the double rocker arm (1) is set, the compression path is reduced or extended and the bale core becomes harder or softer.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 163

15 Settings

15.3

Setting the density of the bale core

Make the following setting on the right and left sides of the machine in the same way:

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Remove the screw (2).

„ Move the stop (3) to the right or left by one borehole into the next position (I), (II) or (III).

ð The 3 positions are explained in more detail below.

„ Fit the screw (2).

„ Ensure that the stop (2) on the right-hand and left sides of the machine is set identically.

To alter the density of the bale core, you can set the following positions. This is exemplified by the Comprima V 180.

I

1

RP000-293

Position (I) of the screw: High bale core density, 1 notch up (1)

2

II

RP000-294

Position (II) of the screw: Mean bale core density, 2 notches up (2)

3

III

164

RP000-295

Position (III) of the screw: Low bale core density, 3 notches up (3)

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Settings 15

Setting the cutting length 15.4

Checking and setting the bale formation conveyor tension at front

15.4

Y

X

1

2 3

RPG000-130

When the double rocker arms (1) on the right and left sides of the machine are at the same height, both springs (3) must have the same spring tension.

Make the following settings on the right and left sides of the machine in the same way:

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The stop (2) is in position (III) (low bale core density).

ü The double rocker arm (1) is positioned on the stop (2).

ü The bale chamber is closed.

Setting the cutting length

1 2

RP000-292

1 Blade group A 2 Blade group B

The cutting length is determined by the number of blades used. The blade groups A and B are swivelled in or out for this purpose.

For version with "17 blades"

Cutting length

-

128 mm

128 mm

64 mm

Number of blades

0

8

9

17

Blade group A off off on on

Blade group B off on off on

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 165

15 Settings

15.5

Checking and setting the position of the feed rocker arm

For version with "26 blades"

Cutting length

-

84 mm

84 mm

42 mm

Number of blades

0

13

13

26

Blade group A off off on on

„

Swivel the required blade groups in or out, refer to page 84 .

15.5

Blade group B off on off on

Checking and setting the position of the feed rocker arm

The position of the feed rocker arm is set via the sensor B61 "Tying 1 (passive)",

refer to page 151 .

The feed rocker arm is moved to the relevant position in the following way using the terminal.

„ Open menu 10 "Manual operation" on the terminal,

refer to page 137 .

„ To move the feed rocker arm to the saved feed position on the round bale, press  or  .

„ To move the feed rocker arm to the saved end position, press or .

If the feed or end position is not correct, a new feed or end position must be saved. This can only be done in menu 15-1 "Sensor test".

„ Open menu 15-1 "Sensor test" on the terminal,

refer to page 147

.

„ To move the feed rocker arm in the direction of the feed position, press or  .

„ To move the feed rocker arm in the direction of the end position, press or

„ Press .

Æ The set position is saved.

.

166

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

15.5.1

Settings 15

Checking and setting the position of the feed rocker arm 15.5

Checking and adjusting the feed position

1

2

X

RP000-029

The feed position has been optimally set when the distance between the feed rocker arm (1) and stop (2) is X=3–5 mm . As a result, the wrapping material is optimally accepted by the round bale.

„ Move the feed rocker arm (1) to the saved feed position on the round bale.

„ Switch off the tractor, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Check whether there is a distance of X=3–5 mm between the feed rocker arm (1) and the stop (2).

If the distance is not X=3–5 mm , set and save the feed position again as follows:

„ Start the tractor.

„ Move the feed rocker arm in the direction of the feed position until the feed rocker arm (1) has approached the stop (2) up to a distance of X=3–5 mm .

„ Save the new position.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 167

15 Settings

15.5

Checking and setting the position of the feed rocker arm

15.5.2

Checking and setting end position for chamber film wrapping

2

3

1

RP000-028

The end position has been optimally set, with chamber film wrapping activated, when the feed rocker arm (1) is in the end position on the insulation of the pressure shaft (2). As a result, the film is clamped and held in position.

„ Open menu 10 "Manual operation" on the terminal,

refer to page 137 .

„ Move the feed rocker arm (1) to the saved end position.

„ Switch off the tractor, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Check whether the conical roller (3) is positioned on the insulation of the pressure shaft (2) and whether the film jams between the insulation of the pressing shaft (2) and the conical roller (3).

If the film is not jammed between the insulation of the pressure shaft (2) and the conical roller (3):

„ Start the tractor.

„ Move the feed rocker arm in the direction of the end position until the conical roller (3) is positioned on the insulation of the pressure shaft (2) and the film is clamped between the insulation and conical shaft.

„ Save the new position.

168

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

15.5.3

Settings 15

Setting wrapping material overhang 15.6

Checking and setting end position for net wrapping

Y

1 2

15.6

RP000-044

The end position has been optimally set when Y=410 mm .

„ Open menu 10 "Manual operation" on the terminal,

refer to page 137 .

„ Move the feed rocker arm (1) to the saved end position.

„ Switch off the tractor, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

„ Check whether the dimension is  Y=410 mm .

If the dimension Y is not Y=410 mm , set and save the end position again as follows:

„ Start the tractor.

„ Move the feed rocker arm in the direction of the end position until the dimension is

Y=410 mm .

„ Save the new position.

Setting wrapping material overhang

I II

X

Y

1

1

2

2

RP000-877

I For version with "Net wrapping" II For version with "Net wrapping and chamber film wrapping"

After each tying process, the net should overhang by X=170–200 mm or the film by Y=230–

260 mm .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 169

15 Settings

15.7

Setting wrapping material brake

Z

3 4 5

15.7

RP000-878

Net wrapping: Dimension preset by KRONE  Z=365 mm

Chamber film wrapping: Dimension preset by KRONE  Z=370-375 mm

If the wrapping material overhang (1) is not X=170–200 mm or Y=230–260 mm , the wire rope (5) must be adjusted as follows.

The greater the dimension Z of the wire rope (5), the greater the wrapping material overhang (1).

The smaller the dimension Z of the wire rope (5), the smaller the wrapping material overhang (1).

„ Adjust the wire rope (5) to the required length using the nut (4) and pawl (3).

Setting wrapping material brake

For version with "Net wrapping"

170

RP000-020

The wrapping material brake is located on the right side of the machine under the storage compartment.

The spring (2) is mounted in such a way that the brake pad (1) is pressed onto the brake disc

(not shown in the picture). This ensures that the wrapping material brake decelerates the feeding of the wrapping material to the round bale. If the net was wrapped around the round bale too loosely or too tightly, the brake force can be set with the nut (4) on the eyelet bolt (3).

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Settings 15

Setting wrapping material brake 15.7

Default dimension set by KRONE: X=40 mm

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The roll holder has been swivelled forwards.

„ To increase the brake force, increase the dimension X.

„ To reduce the brake force, reduce the dimension X.

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

6

1

2

3

4

5

X

RP000-608

The wrapping material brake is located on the right side of the machine under the storage compartment.

The spring (2) is mounted in such a way that the brake pad (1) is pressed onto the brake disc

(not shown in the picture). This ensures that the wrapping material brake decelerates the feeding of the wrapping material to the round bale.

If the stretching of the film is too strong or too weak or if the net around the round bale has been tied too strong or too weak, it is possible to increase or reduce the brake force of the wrapping

material brake by means of the nut (5) at the eyelet bolt (3). To check the stretching, refer to page 95

.

The pre-set dimension X for net wrapping and chamber film wrapping is X=21 mm .

If "KRONE excellent" net or film is not used for the tying, the brake force may have to be adjusted at the eyelet bolt (3).

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The roll holder has been swivelled forwards.

„ To increase the brake force, increase the dimension X or hook the eyelet bolt (3) into the upper cone (4), if necessary.

„ To reduce the brake force, reduce the dimension X.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 171

15 Settings

15.8

Setting the brake force release when feeding wrapping material

15.8

Setting the brake force release when feeding wrapping material

4

1

2

3

RP000-019

Particularly when the chamber film wrapping is set, there is a risk that the film will overturn on the film roll instead of being fed to the round bale. If this happens, the brake force release should be adjusted for the feed process.

When the wrapping material is guided to the round bale, the brake force should be reduced so that the wrapping material can be pulled more easily off the round bale.

This brake force release during the feed process can be set on the spring (3) on the right side of the machine behind the side hood.

The more the spring (3) is tensioned, the greater the brake force release during the feed process.

ü The actuator for wrapping process is in the feed position,

refer to page 137

.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Check that the disc (2) is located above the spring (3) at the level of the central notch (4).

„ To change the tension of the spring (3), loosen or tighten the nut (1).

Notches (4) top central bottom

Spring tension (3) low medium strong

Wrapping material for the feed process

The wrapping material can be pulled with difficulty.

The wrapping material can be pulled with medium strength. KRONE recommends this setting as an optimum brake force release during the feeding of the wrapping material.

The wrapping material can be pulled easily.

172

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

15.9

Settings 15

Checking and setting the axial play of the brake disc at the wrapping material brake 15.9

Checking and setting the axial play of the brake disc at the wrapping material brake

X

1 2 3

4 5 3

4

6

RP000-023

The axial play of the brake disc (4) on the wrapping material brake must be adjusted, etc.,

before setting the sensor B02 "Tying process active ", refer to page 147

.

The axial play must be X=1–2 mm .

„ To release the wrapping material brake, press the lever (5) downwards.

„ Measure the axial play X of the brake disc (4) to the adjusting collar (1).

If the axial play is not X=1–2 mm :

„ Raise the lever (6).

„ Swivel the brake disc (4) with the roll holder (3) forwards and pull off the brake disc (4).

„ Loosen the threaded pin (2) and dismount the adjusting collar (1).

„ Use shim rings to set the required axial play X.

„ Mount the adjusting collar (1) and tighten the threaded pin (2).

„ Push the brake disc (4) onto the roll holder (3) and swivel it back into the machine.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 173

15 Settings

15.10 Locking/releasing the tension lever

15.10

Locking/releasing the tension lever

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

1

174

I

II

3

4

3

2

4

RP000-187

Position (I) (net wrapping)

The locking pin with ball head (3) is released (shown with a red border in the figure). The tension lever (2) is positioned on the net roll (1).

Position (II) (chamber film wrapping)

The locking pin with ball head (3) is locked in the side wall (shown with a red border in the figure). This keeps the tension lever (2) in bottom position to prevent it from touching the film roll (1).

Setting the chamber film wrapping (from position (I) to position (II))

„ To lock the locking pin with ball head (3), turn the ball head clockwise until the roll pin (4) moves through the slot.

„ At the same time, move the tension lever (2) downwards to the borehole.

Æ The compression spring automatically presses the bolt into the borehole.

Setting the net wrapping (from position (II) to position (I))

„ To release the locking pin with ball head (3), turn the ball head anti-clockwise and pull the bolt in the direction of the arrow until the roll pin (4) moves through the slot and the bolt has engaged.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Settings 15

Setting the lock of the tapered roller 15.11

15.11

Setting the lock of the tapered roller

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

1

2

I

2

II

2

RP000-465

Position (I) (net wrapping)

The locking bar (2) locks the conical roller (1) to prevent it from rotating during net wrapping.

Position (II) (chamber film wrapping)

The locking bar (2) releases the conical roller (1) to ensure that it rotates during chamber film wrapping.

„ To lock the conical roller (1) for net wrapping, pull the locking bar (2) and turn it anticlockwise until it engages in position (I).

„ To release the conical roller (1) for chamber film wrapping, pull the locking bar (2) and turn it clockwise until it engages in position (II).

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 175

15 Settings

15.12 Checking the retaining comb for net wrapping

15.12

Checking the retaining comb for net wrapping

For version with "Net wrapping"

2

3

X

1

RP000-186

The retaining comb (1) is located on the front of the machine under the storage compartment.

Make the following check on the right and left sides of the machine in the same way:

„ Check whether the dimension X on the spring (2) is X=15 mm .

„ If the dimension is not X=15 mm , set the dimension on the nut (3).

176

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Settings 15

Checking the retaining comb for chamber film wrapping 15.13

15.13

Checking the retaining comb for chamber film wrapping

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

1

2

3

X

RP000-025

The retaining comb (1) is located on the front of the machine under the storage compartment.

Make the following check on the right and left sides of the machine in the same way:

„ Check whether the dimension X on the spring is X=5 mm .

„ If the dimension is not X=5 mm , set the dimension on the nut (3).

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 177

15 Settings

15.14 Setting the retaining comb for chamber film wrapping

15.14

Setting the retaining comb for chamber film wrapping

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

178

1

2

3

I II

4

4

5

5

RP000-030

Position I

The trapezoidal rubbers (4) on the underside of the retaining comb have been pre-assembled with the short side pointing backwards, seen in direction of travel. The figure shows the underside of the retaining comb.

Position II

If the blue strips (1) are taken along by the first net feed roller with a delay or are not taken along, you can reverse the trapezoidal rubbers (4). This provides additional support.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Settings 15

Setting the working lights 15.15

Make the following setting on all 6 trapezoidal rubbers (4):

„ Remove the screw connections (3) and the metal strip (2).

„ Turn the trapezoidal rubber (4) by 180° so that the shorter end points in the direction of travel (position II).

„ Ensure that the brown fabric side is facing down.

„ Mount the metal strip (2) with the screw connections (3).

„ Ensure that the borehole (5) on the metal strip (2) is facing against the direction of travel.

15.15

Setting the working lights

For "working lights 1.0" version

The interior working lights on the side hoods on the left- and right-hand side of the machine can be set as required. The working lights are turned on and off using the keys the terminal,

refer to page 108

.

and  in

RPG000-101

„ Turn the light (1) so that the desired area is illuminated.

1

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 179

15 Settings

15.16 Setting oil quantities for the central chain lubrication unit

15.16

Setting oil quantities for the central chain lubrication unit

14

20

180

19

15

16

17

18

13

2

8

3

9

6

12

5

11

1 7

RPG000-135

The central chain lubrication system is located on the left side of the machine behind the side hood.

With each revolution of the drive shaft, the oil pump (19) pushes out oil out of the tank (20) via the nozzles (1), (2), (3), (5), (6), (7), (8), (9), (11) and (12) to the oil brushes on the drives.

To service the central chain lubrication system, refer to page 216

.

Setting oil quantities

The oil quantities for the individual brushes of the central chain lubrication system can be increased or reduced at the oil pump (19). The figures 1–12 given in the image are located on the plug-in couplings on the oil pump (19).

To set the oil quantities, the setting screws (14), (15), (16), (17) and (18) are turned. One complete turn corresponds to a quarter of the maximum oil quantity.

For an overview of the oil brushes on the machine, refer to page 217 .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Unscrew the cover (13) on the oil pump.

„ To increase the oil quantity, turn the desired setting screw (14), (15), (16), (17) or (18) clockwise.

„ To reduce the oil quantity, turn the desired setting screw (14), (15), (16), (17) or (18) anticlockwise.

The setting screws are assigned as follows:

Pos.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Oil lubrication for

Feed roller drive

Starter roller drive setting screw

Bale formation conveyor drive front (16) grey

(17) red

(18) yellow

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Pos.

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(11)

(12)

Settings 15

Setting oil quantities for the central chain lubrication unit 15.16

Oil lubrication for

Pick-up drive

Pick-up drive/auger conveyor setting screw

(14) blue

Intake drive (15) black

Bale formation conveyor drive front (16) grey

(17) red Pick-up drive

Pick-up drive/auger conveyor

Starter roller drive (18) yellow

(14) blue Spur wheel drive/

Bale formation conveyor drive rear

Intake drive (15) black

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 181

16 Maintenance

16.1

Maintenance table

16 Maintenance

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, refer to page 15 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 27

.

16.1

16.1.1

Maintenance table

Maintenance – Before the season

Checking oil level

Main gearbox

Chain lubrication unit

refer to page 193

refer to page 216

Components

Adjust drive chains

Tighten screws/nuts on the machine

Retightening wheel nuts

Check tyre pressure

Cleaning bushing and drawbar eye

Clean the filter on the central chain lubrication system

Lubricate the safety rolls of the single blade locking device

Drain condensation water out of the compressed air tanks of the compressed air brake

Prepare brake disc of the wrapping material brake

refer to page 204

refer to page 188

refer to page 192 refer to page 192

refer to page 196

refer to page 216

refer to page 204

refer to page 219

refer to page 47

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart

Actuate tying cycle and check functions

Check hydraulic hoses

refer to page 185

refer to page 73

refer to page 194

Cleaning deflection pipes or conical tying roller

refer to page 194

Check the electrical connection cables and, if necessary, have them repaired or changed by a KRONE service partner

182

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

16.1.2

Maintenance – After the season

Components

Clean the machine

Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart

Lubricate the universal shaft

Grease the threads of the setting screws

Drain condensation water out of the compressed air tanks of the compressed air brake

Cleaning drive chains

Grease the uncoated piston rods of all hydraulic cylinders and insert as far as possible

refer to page 194

refer to page 185

refer to page 188

refer to page 219

refer to page 197

Lightly coat with oil all those lever joints and bearing positions which cannot be lubricated

Touch up damaged paint and preserve uncoated areas with rust protection agent

Check that all moveable components move freely. If required, dismount, clean, grease and remount.

Protecting brake disc of the wrapping material brake from corrosion

refer to page 197

Park the machine in a weatherproof and dry location which is not in close proximity to corrosive substances

Protect the tyres against external influences such as oil, grease or direct sunlight

16.1.3

Maintenance – once after 10 hours

Components

Retightening wheel nuts

refer to page 192

Tighten the screw connections on the drawbar

refer to page 197

Check tyre pressure

refer to page 192

Have the slack adjuster of the brake system checked by KRONE service partners

Check the hydraulic hoses for leaks and, if necessary, have them replaced by a KRONE service partner.

refer to page 194

Cleaning bushing and drawbar eye

refer to page 196

Change/replace blades

Check rear bale formation conveyor and adjust if required

refer to page 200

refer to page 208

Maintenance 16

Maintenance table 16.1

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 183

16 Maintenance

16.1

Maintenance table

16.1.4

Maintenance – once after 50 hours

Changing oil

Main gearbox

refer to page 193

16.1.5

Maintenance – every 10 hours, at least daily

Checking oil level

Main gearbox

refer to page 193

Components

Clean the machine

Check function of the brake system

Cleaning bushing and drawbar eye

refer to page 194

refer to page 196

16.1.6

Maintenance – every 50 hours

Components

Tighten screws/nuts on the machine

refer to page 188

Tighten the screw connections on the drawbar

refer to page 197

Retightening wheel nuts

Check tyre pressure

Drain condensation water out of the compressed air tanks of the compressed air brake

refer to page 192 refer to page 192

refer to page 219

16.1.7

Maintenance – every 500 hours

Changing oil

Main gearbox

refer to page 193

16.1.8

Maintenance – Every 1,000 round bales

Components

Check rear bale formation conveyor and adjust if required

refer to page 208

16.1.9

Maintenance – Every 2 years

Components

Have compressed-air tanks checked by

KRONE service partner

Have pneumatic brake cylinders serviced by

KRONE service partner

184

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

16.2

Maintenance 16

Lubrication chart 16.2

Lubrication chart

NOTICE

Damage to bearing points

When using lubricating greases not approved and when mixing different lubricating greases, the lubricated parts may be damaged.

„ Only use approved lubricating greases,

refer to page 44 .

„ Do not use graphite-containing lubricating greases.

„ Do not mix different lubricating greases.

NOTICE

Environmental damage caused by consumables

If consumables are not stored and disposed of properly, they may escape into the environment. As a result, the environment will be damaged, even by small quantities.

„ Store the consumables in suitable containers according to the statutory provisions.

„ Dispose of used consumables according to statutory provisions.

The information on maintenance intervals is based on average load of the machine. In case of an increased load and under extreme working conditions, the time periods must be reduced.

The types of lubrication are marked by means of icons in the lubrication chart, refer to table.

The remaining lubrication points are lubricated via the central lubrication unit,

refer to page 210 .

Type of lubrication

Grease

Lubricating

Lubricant

Multi-purpose grease

Multi-purpose grease

Comment

„ Apply two strokes of lubricating grease from the grease gun per grease nipple.

„ Remove excess lubricating grease at the grease nipple.

„ Remove old lubricating grease.

„ Apply a coat of new lubricating grease thinly with a brush.

„ Remove excessive lubricating grease.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 185

16 Maintenance

16.2

Lubrication chart

Left side of machine

1

RPG000-029

Every 20 operating hours

(2) For "Tandem axle" version“

Every 50 operating hours

(1) (3)

3 2

186

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Right and rear side of machine

Maintenance 16

Lubrication chart 16.2

RPG000-030

Every 20 operating hours

(1) For "Tandem axle" version“

1 2

Every 50 operating hours

(2)

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 187

16 Maintenance

16.3

Lubricating the universal shaft

16.3

Lubricating the universal shaft

16.4

RP000-176

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Observe operating instructions of the universal shaft manufacturer.

„ Clean the universal shaft.

„ Lubricate the universal shaft with multi-purpose grease at the intervals indicated in the table below.

For a list of the lubricating greases to be used,

refer to page 44 .

The following table provides information about the lubricant quantity and the lubrication interval per lubrication point.

Pos.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Lubricant quantity

18 g

30 g

20 g

6 g

Lubrication interval

50 hours

Tightening torques

Deviating tightening torques

All screw connections must in general be tightened with the listed tightening torques following.

Deviations from the tables are marked accordingly.

Metric thread screws with control thread

INFORMATION

The table does not apply to countersunk screws with hexagon socket in case the countersunk screw is tightened via hexagon socket.

188

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Tightening torques 16.4

M16

M20

M22

M24

M27

M30

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

DV000-001

X Thread size

X Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

3.0

5.9

10

29

42

25

49

85

135

210

425

571

730

1,100

1,450

1 Strength class on screw head

10.9

310

610

832

1,050

1,550

2,100

4.4

8.7

15

36

72

125

200

12.9

365

710

972

1,220

1,800

2,450

5.1

10

18

43

84

145

235

Metric thread screws with fine thread

DV000-001

X Thread size

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

1 Strength class on screw head

189

16 Maintenance

16.4

Tightening torques

X

M12 x 1.5

M14 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M18 x 1.5

M20 x 1.5

M24 x 2

M27 x 2

M30 x 1.5

Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

88

145

222

368

465

787

1,148

800

10.9

130

213

327

525

662

1,121

1,635

2,100

12.9

152

249

382

614

775

1,312

1,914

2,650

Metric thread screws with countersunk head and hexagon socket

INFORMATION

The table applies only to countersunk screws with hexagon socket and metric thread tightened via hexagon socket.

190

M4

M5

M6

M8

M10

M12

M14

M16

M20

DV000-000

X Thread size

X Strength class

5.6

8.8

Tightening torque (Nm)

2.5

4.7

8

23

34

20

39

68

108

168

340

1 Strength class on screw head

10.9

3.5

7

12

29

58

100

160

248

488

12.9

4.1

8

15

35

67

116

188

292

568

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

16.5

Maintenance 16

Checking/maintaining tyres 16.5

Locking screws on the gearboxes

INFORMATION

The tightening torques only apply to assembly of locking screws, viewing glasses, ventilation and breather filters and bleed valves in gearboxes with cast housings or aluminium or steel housings. The term “locking screw” includes the drain plug, the inspection screw as well as the ventilation and breather filters.

This table applies only to locking screws with external hexagon in connection with copper seal ring and for bleed valves made of brass with shaped seal ring.

Thread

M10x1

M12x1.5

G1/4“

M14x1.5

M16x1.5

45

M18x1.5

50

M20x1.5

Locking screw and sight glass with copper ring 1

Bleed valve made of brass

Ventilation/breather filter made of steel

Steel and cast Aluminium

Ventilation/breather filter made of brass

Steel and cast

Maximum tightening torque (Nm) (±10%)

Aluminium

8

14

14

40

45

16

24

30

32

24

30

G1/2“

M22x1.5

M24x1.5

G3/4“

M33x2

G1“

M42x1.5

G1 1/4“

32

35

60

60

80

80

100

100

1  Always replace copper rings.

Checking/maintaining tyres

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Inspect the tyres visually

„ Visually inspect tyres for cuts or breaks.

Æ If there are cuts or breaks in the tyres, have the tyres repaired or replaced by a KRONE service partner.

Maintenance intervals for visual inspection of the tyres,

refer to page 182 .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 191

16 Maintenance

16.5

Checking/maintaining tyres

Checking/adapting the tyre pressure

„

Check the tyre pressure, refer to page 43

.

Æ If the tyre pressure is too high, deflate air.

Æ If the tyre pressure is too low, increase the tyre pressure.

Check the maintenance intervals for tyre pressure, refer to page 182 .

Retighten wheel nuts

DVG000-002

„

Retighten the wheel nuts crosswise (as shown) with a torque wrench, tightening torque refer to page 192

.

Maintanance intervals, refer to page 182 .

Tightening torque: wheel nuts

Thread Key size

M12x1.5

M14x1.5

M18x1.5

M20x1.5

M20x1.5

M22x1.5

M22x2

19 mm

22 mm

24 mm

27 mm

30 mm

32 mm

32 mm

Amount of bolts per hub

4/5 units

5 units

Maximum tightening torque black galvanised

95 Nm 95 Nm

125 Nm 125 Nm

6 units

8 units

8 units

8/10 units

10 units

290 Nm

380 Nm

380 Nm

510 Nm

460 Nm

320 Nm

420 Nm

420 Nm

560 Nm

505 Nm

192

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Servicing the main gearbox 16.6

16.6

Servicing the main gearbox

1

3

2

RPG000-089

The main gearbox (1) is located behind the drawbar in the front area of the machine. The locking screw of the inspection and filling hole (3) is located on the side of the main gearbox.

The locking screw (2) for the oil drain is located on the underside of the main gearbox (1).

Maintenance intervals: refer to page 182

Amount and type specifications of the oil:

refer to page 44

ü The machine is horizontal on stable and level ground.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü

The drawbar height has been set correctly, refer to page 48

.

Checking oil level

„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection and filling hole (3).

ð The oil must reach the inspection and filling hole (3).

If the oil reaches the inspection and filling hole (3):

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection and filling hole (3), tightening torque

refer to page 191

.

If the oil does not reach the inspection and filling hole (3):

„ Top up with fresh oil via the inspection and filling hole (3) up to the inspection and filling hole (3).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection and filling hole (3), tightening torque

refer to page 191

.

Changing the oil

ü A suitable container is available for escaping oil.

„ Remove the locking screw from the inspection and filling hole (3).

„ Remove the locking screw (2) from the oil drain.

„ Collect the oil in a container.

„

Screw in the locking screw (2), refer to page 191 .

„ Pour in fresh oil via the inspection and filling hole (3) up to the inspection and filling hole (3).

„ Screw the locking screw into the inspection and filling hole (3), tightening torque

refer to page 191

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 193

16 Maintenance

16.7

Checking hydraulic hoses

16.7

Checking hydraulic hoses

Hydraulic hoses are subject to natural aging. This limits their service life. The recommended service life is 6 years, including a maximum storage time of 2 years. The date of manufacture is printed on the hydraulic hoses. When checking hydraulic hoses, the state-specific conditions

(e.g., BGVU) must be observed.

Performing a visual inspection

„ Visually inspect all hydraulic hoses for damage and leaks and have them replaced by an authorised specialist if necessary.

16.8

16.9

Cleaning the machine

WARNING

Eye damage caused by flying dirt particles!

When cleaning the machine with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, the dirt particles are slung away at high speed. The dirt particles may hit the eyes and hurt them.

„ Keep persons away from working range.

„ When performing cleaning work with compressed air or with high-pressure cleaner, wear suitable working clothes (for example eye protection).

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to water damages with high-pressure cleaner

If the water jet from a high-pressure cleaner is aimed directly at bearings and electrical/ electronic components, these parts can be damaged.

„ Do not aim the water jet from high-pressure cleaner at bearings and electrics/electronic components.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ After each use, clean the following areas on the machine:

• the complete area around the tying,

• the drive wheels and the upper compression roller in the front bale chamber.

„ Also after each use, clean all moving parts on the brake linkage and brake lever with compressed air, e.g. piston rod, brake lever and slack adjuster. This can prevent mechanical blockages.

„ If required, repeat the cleaning several times a day.

Cleaning deflection pipes or conical tying roller

The maintenance intervals can be found in the maintenance table,

refer to page 182

.

194

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

For version with "Net wrapping"

Maintenance 16

Cleaning deflection pipes or conical tying roller 16.9

1

2

RP000-467

„ Remove any corrosion from all fixed deflection pipes (1) and from the brake surface of the brake disc (2) in the tying unit.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 195

16 Maintenance

16.10 Clean the bushing and the drawbar eye

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

1

RP000-468

„ Check the conical roller (1) for any corrosion and remove the corrosion as required.

„ Remove any corrosion from the brake surface of the brake disc (not shown here) on the wrapping material brake.

16.10

Clean the bushing and the drawbar eye

1 2

X

RPG000-189

The drawbar eye must always be coupled horizontally in the towing hitch. The wear limit of the socket (1) in the drawbar eye (2) is X=43 mm . If the dimension X is exceeded, the drawbar eye (1) must be replaced by a KRONE service partner.

„ To minimize wear, clean the bushing (1) and the drawbar eye (2) several times a day and coat with grease.

196

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Cleaning drive chains 16.11

16.11

Cleaning drive chains

At the end of the season the machine drive chains must be cleaned.

„ Clean the drive chains with a high-pressure cleaner and leave to dry.

„ Wet the cleaned and dried chains with engine oil.

„ Start up the machine to distribute the engine oil on all contact surfaces.

„ Check the chains and sprocket wheels for wear.

16.12

Protecting brake disc of the wrapping material brake from corrosion

1 2

RP000-466

„ To prevent corrosion on the brake disc of the wrapping material brake, mask the brake surface of the brake disc (2) with insulating tape (1).

16.13

Checking the screw connections on the drawbar

2

1

RPG000-088

„ Check whether the screw connections (1) or (2) have been tightened to the correct tightening torque.

„ Tighten the screw connections (1) on the drawbar to the tightening torque 210 Nm .

„ Tighten the screw connections (2) on the drawbar eye to the tightening torque 730 Nm .

Maintenance interval,

refer to page 182

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 197

16 Maintenance

16.14 Setting the scraper and stone deflector

16.14

Setting the scraper and stone deflector

16.14.1

Setting the scraper to the spiral roller

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

The following information label is affixed to the machine:

1

2

27 018 237 0

RPG000-192

„ Ensure that the scraper (2) is very close to the spiral roller (1).

„ If the scraper (2) is not very close to the spiral roller (1), set the scraper (2) as described below.

ü

The tailgate is open and the tailgate is hydraulically locked, refer to page 76

.

ü The side guard on the right side of the machine is open.

Loosening scraper reinforcer

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

1

4

2

3 1

3

RP000-302

3 scraper reinforcers (3) are also mounted on the scraper rail (1). These scraper reinforcers (3) and the scraper rail (1) should be positioned on the spiral roller (2).

To set the scraper rail (1), loosen the scraper reinforcers (3):

„ Loosen the screw connections (2).

Æ The scraper reinforcers (3) can be moved in the oblong hole.

198

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Setting the scraper and stone deflector 16.14

Setting the scraper rail

For version with "Net wrapping" or "Net and chamber film wrapping"

1 2 3 4

3

5

6

7

RP000-531

„ Mount the scraper bar (1) in the centre of the oblong hole in the lateral housing part and slightly tighten the screw connection (6) on both outer sides of the bale chamber.

„ Position the scraper rail (3) up to the spiral roller (4).

„ Tighten all screw connections (2) and the threaded pins (7).

„ Hammer in the clamping wedge (5) on both outer sides of the bale chamber and tighten the screw connection (6).

„ Turn machine manually and check whether the scraper rail (3) is positioned the spiral roller (4).

If the scraper rail (3) is not positioned on the spiral roller (4):

„ Loosen the screw connection (6) on the clamping wedge (5).

„ Turn the clamping wedge (5) by 180° and tighten the screw connection (6).

INFORMATION

It is possible to turn the clamping wedge by 180° as its dimensions from oblong hole to the upper and lower stop edge are different.

Setting and tightening the scraper reinforcer

For the "Net and chamber film wrapping" version

1

4

2

3 1

3

RP000-302

„ Place the scraper reinforcer (3) on the spiral roller (4).

„

Tighten the screw connections (2), tightening torque, refer to page 188 .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 199

16 Maintenance

16.15 Releasing the cam clutch on the universal shaft

16.14.2

Setting the stone deflectors

All stone deflectors on the deflection shafts must be regularly checked and adjusted.

1

1

2

RP000-312

Proceed as follows on all stone deflectors:

„ Set the stone deflector (1) parallel and at a distance of 5-10 mm from the bale formation conveyor (2).

16.15

Releasing the cam clutch on the universal shaft

If the cam clutch was actuated during the baling process on the universal shaft due to an overload, proceed as follows:

„ Switch off the PTO shaft.

„ Switch on the PTO shaft at a lower idle speed until the cam clutch has engaged.

„ Shift up the PTO shaft to rated speed.

16.16

Changing the blades

ü The pick-up is fully raised in transport position,

refer to page 79

.

ü The blade cassette has been lowered,

refer to page 84

.

ü The tailgate is open and secured by the stop cock on the tailgate.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Moving blades to maintenance position

„ For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system": Move the blade cassette hydraulically via the terminal into the maintenance position,

refer to page 116

.

„

Unlock the blade retaining shaft, refer to page 201 .

200

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Unlocking/locking blade retaining shaft 16.17

Removing the blades

WARNING

Risk of injury due to sharp blades which have been pre-tensioned with spring force

When performing maintenance on the blade cassette, there is a risk of injury to fingers and hands due to sharp blades.

„ When working on the blade cassette, work particularly carefully and prudently.

„ When working on the blade cassette, always wear protective gloves.

„ Do not press the blades manually into the working position. Instead, use an auxiliary tool, such as a hammer.

„

Before working on the blade cassette, shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

1

2

RP000-150

„ Remove the blades (1).

„ Insert a new or a ground blade (1).

„ Ensure that the blade (1) is correctly positioned on the blade control shaft and is centred in the slot (2).

„ After inserting all blades (1), check that all blades (1) are in alignment.

INFORMATION

If the cutting unit is not switched on for a prolonged period, the blades can be replaced with dummy blades in order to avoid soiling the blade cassette slots and wearing the blades.

The dummy blades can be ordered by quoting the following order number 20 065 405*.

16.17

Unlocking/locking blade retaining shaft

NOTICE

Damage to machine from unlocked blade retaining shaft

If the blade retaining shaft is not locked before commissioning, the blades can become loose during travel. This may damage the machine.

„ Ensure that the blade retaining shaft is locked before putting the machine back into service.

If work has to be carried out on the blades of the cutting unit, the blade retaining shaft must be unlocked beforehand. After work, the blade retaining shaft must be locked again.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 201

16 Maintenance

16.18 Checking and moving the blade retaining shaft

1

II

2

3

I

RPG000-156

Unlocking

„ Pull handle (3) out of position (I) and allow it to engage in position (II).

If the handle (3) cannot be moved manually:

„ Remove the supplied tool (1).

„ Place the tool (1) on the blade retaining shaft (2) and turn it to position (II) and allow it to engage.

Locking

„ Pull the handle (3) out of position (II) and let it engage in position (I).

If the handle (3) cannot be moved manually:

„ Remove the supplied tool (1).

„ Place the tool (1) on the blade retaining shaft (2) and turn it to position (I) and allow it to engage.

Æ After locking the blade retaining shaft (2), the blades swivel independently upwards into the working position.

16.18

Checking and moving the blade retaining shaft

Checking the blade retaining shaft

I 2 II 2

1 1

3

202

RPG000-160

The area around the groove (1), in which the blades (2) on the blade retaining shaft (3) are located, wears during use.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Grinding the blades 16.19

The blade retaining shaft (3) is factory-set in position (I). If the area around the groove (1) is worn by 1 mm in position (I), the blade retaining shaft (3) can be moved once to position (II).

The blade retaining shaft (3) does not have to be replaced until the groove (1) is also worn by

1 mm in position (II).

Moving the blade retaining shaft

I

2

II

1 3

1 3 2

RPG000-161

ü

The blades have been removed, refer to page 200

.

WARNING! Risk of injury from spring under tension! Proceed with special care when moving the blade retaining shaft.

„ Knock out the roll pin (1) on both sides of the machine.

„ Move the blade retaining shaft (2) by 8 mm.

„ Knock the roll pin (1) into the opening (3) on both sides of the machine.

16.19

Grinding the blades

INFORMATION

KRONE recommend the KRONE blade grinding machine for grinding the blades.

Contact your KRONE dealer. For further information, please refer to the operating instructions of the blade grinding machine.

Correctly ground, sharp blades reduce fuel consumption and the wear on the cutting components. They also guarantee good cutting quality and ideal crop throughput.

The sharpness of the blades must be checked at least once a day. With crops with a high level of contamination/foreign bodies, checks must be performed several times a day.

Grinding blades without blade grinding machine

1 2

α

±1

RPG000-112

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 203

16 Maintenance

16.20 Checking/lubricating the safety rolls of the single blade locking device

1 Smooth blade side 2 Serrated blade

ü

The blade has been removed from the blade cassette, refer to page 200 .

WARNING! Danger of cuts from sharp blades! Wear suitable protective gloves.

„ Remove any coarse dirt deposited on the blade.

„ Clamp the blade in a suitable vice.

WARNING! Danger of injury from flying sparks! During the grinding process, always wear protective gloves, hearing protection and safety glasses.

NOTICE! During grinding, be sure not to heat the blade excessively and not to cut any notches as this will reduce the lifetime of the blade. Frequent grinding with pauses in between is better for the blade lifetime than excessively long grinding.

„ Grind the cutting edge (1) maintaining an angle of (α=10 degrees ±1 degree)..

„ Use suitable tools to touch up serrated blades (2).

16.20

Checking/lubricating the safety rolls of the single blade locking device

The single blade locking device prevents the blades from being damaged when coming into contact with foreign objects. To ensure that the single blade locking device functions perfectly, the safety rolls must rotate smoothly.

Whenever a blade is changed , check whether the safety rolls run smoothly.

1

RP000-309

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ If the safety rolls (1) do not run smoothly, lubricate the safety rolls with an EP long-term grease NLGI 2.

16.21

Adjust drive chains

WARNING

Risk of injury due to moving drive chains

When working on drive chains, there is a risk of injury due to entanglement of loose long hair or loose clothing.

„

When working on the drive chains, wear protective equipment, refer to page 20

.

„

Before working on any drive chains, shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

204

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Adjust drive chains 16.21

16.21.1

Drive chain of the pick-up

1

5

3 4

3

X

1

X 2

2

RP000-160

The drive chain of the pick-up main drive (1) and the drive chain of the pick-up (2) are located on the pick-up on the right side of the machine behind the pick-up guard. The drive chains (1, 2) are tensioned with the tension springs (3).

The dimension X

1

and X

2

of the tensioned spring length must be X

1

=60 mm and X

2

=60 mm .

Setting the drive chain

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The pick-up is lowered to working position,

refer to page 79 .

ü The pick-up guard on the right side of the machine has been removed.

ü The drive chains (1) and (2) and the pick-up guard have been cleaned.

„ To increase the chain tension, turn nut (4) and (5) clockwise until the dimension X

1

=60 mm and X

2

=60 mm has been set.

„ To reduce the chain tension, turn nut (4) and (5) anti-clockwise until the dimension

X

1

=60 mm and X

2

=60 mm has been set.

INFORMATION

The drive chain is supplied with oil via the central chain lubrication system,

refer to page 180 .

Spring discs of the pick-up drive

2

1

RP000-472

„ After repairing the pick-up drive (1), ensure that the disc springs (2) are arranged as shown.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 205

16 Maintenance

16.21 Adjust drive chains

16.21.2

Drive chain of the intake

1

2 3

X

RP000-471

The drive chain (1) of the intake (starter rollers/feed roller) is located on the right side of the machine.

The dimension X of the tensioned spring length (2) must be X=200 mm .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The right side hood is open.

„ To tension the drive chain (1), use the nut on the eyelet bolt (3) to set the dimension  X=200 mm .

INFORMATION

The drive chain is supplied with oil via the central chain lubrication system,

refer to page 180 .

16.21.3

Drive chain of the bale formation conveyor

Front bale formation conveyor

1

206

3

4

X

2

5

6

7

RPG000-132

The drive chain (1) of the front bale formation conveyor drive and the upper compression roller are located on the left side of the machine.

The dimension X of the tensioned spring length (3) must be X=80 mm .

Setting drive chain

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The left side hood is open.

„ Remove the protective device (2).

„ To tension the drive chain (1), use the nut (4) to set the dimension X=80 mm .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Adjust drive chains 16.21

If the spring tension cannot be set to the dimension X in this way, set the threaded rod (6):

„ Suspend the support (6) on the threaded rod (7) in a deeper borehole (5).

INFORMATION

The drive chain is supplied with oil via the central chain lubrication system,

refer to page 180 .

Rear bale formation conveyor

X

1

3

4

2

RPG000-146

The drive chain (2) of the rear bale formation conveyor drive is on the right side of the machine.

The dimension X of the tensioned spring length (1) must be X=390 mm .

Setting drive chain

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The right side hood is open.

„ To correct the chain tension, use the nut (8) to set the dimension X=390 mm .

INFORMATION

The drive chain is supplied with oil via the central chain lubrication system,

refer to page 180 .

16.21.4

Drive chain of the auger conveyor

2

3

X

1

4

RP000-473

The drive chain (2) of the left auger conveyor is on the left side of the machine behind the pickup guard (1).

The dimension X of the tensioned spring length (3) must be X=60 mm .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 207

16 Maintenance

16.22 Checking rear bale formation conveyor

ü The pick-up guard (1) has been removed.

ü The drive chain (2) and the pick-up guard have been cleaned.

„ To tension the drive chain (2), use the nut (4) to set the dimension X=60 mm .

INFORMATION

The drive chain is supplied with oil via the central chain lubrication system,

refer to page 180 .

16.21.5

Drive chain of the starter roller and the lower compression roller

1 2

3

X

RP000-474

The drive chain (1) of the starter roller and lower compression roller is located on the right side of the machine.

The dimension X of the tensioned spring length (3) must be X=220 mm .

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The right side hood is open.

„ To tension the drive chain (1), use the nut (2) to set the dimension X=220 mm .

INFORMATION

The drive chain is supplied with oil via the central chain lubrication system,

refer to page 180 .

16.22

Checking rear bale formation conveyor

1 2

B

3

4 X

RP000-453

The rear bale formation conveyor should be regularly checked to prevent the rear bale formation conveyor from being damaged or torn.

208

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Moving deflection roll on the rear bale formation conveyor 16.23

The maintenance intervals are in the maintenance table,

refer to page 182

.

„ Start to press a round bale (4) with the machine.

„ When the bale diameter of the round bale (4) is X=800-1,000 mm , stop the machine.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27

.

„ Check the dimension Y between the front tensioning rocker (1) and the rear tensioning rocker (2).

Æ If the dimension Y>20 mm , the setting is correct.

Æ If the dimension Y<20 mm , the deflection roll (3) must be moved,

refer to page 209 .

16.23

Moving deflection roll on the rear bale formation conveyor

If it was determined, when checking the rear bale formation conveyor (

refer to page 208

), that the tensioning rockers were too close to each other, the deflection roll must be moved.

I

II

1

2

3

RP000-454

ü The side hood on the left side of the machine is open.

ü The rear side guard on the left side of the machine side has been removed.

„ Removing the scraper (3).

„ Remove the threaded pin from the adjusting ring on the deflection shaft (2) and remove the adjusting ring.

„ Remove the deflection shaft (2).

„ Mount the deflection shaft (2) with the deflection shaft (1) in position (II).

„ Push the adjusting ring onto the deflection shaft (2) and secure with the threaded pin.

„ Mount the scraper (3) at a higher position.

„ Check whether the tensioning rocker touches the belt and causes brush marks on the belt.

If the tensioning rocker touches the belt:

„ Mount the deflection roll (1) in position (I) as described above.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 209

16 Maintenance

16.24 Checking and setting the axial play of the brake disc at the wrapping material brake

INFORMATION

Only mount the deflection roll (1) in position (I) if the tensioning rocker continues to touch the belt. The belt is otherwise unnecessary loaded.

16.24

Checking and setting the axial play of the brake disc at the wrapping material brake

X

1 2 3

4 5 3

4

6

RP000-023

The axial play of the brake disc (4) on the wrapping material brake must be adjusted, etc.,

before setting the sensor B02 "Tying process active ", refer to page 147

.

The axial play must be X=1–2 mm .

„ To release the wrapping material brake, press the lever (5) downwards.

„ Measure the axial play X of the brake disc (4) to the adjusting collar (1).

If the axial play is not X=1–2 mm :

„ Raise the lever (6).

„ Swivel the brake disc (4) with the roll holder (3) forwards and pull off the brake disc (4).

„ Loosen the threaded pin (2) and dismount the adjusting collar (1).

„ Use shim rings to set the required axial play X.

„ Mount the adjusting collar (1) and tighten the threaded pin (2).

„ Push the brake disc (4) onto the roll holder (3) and swivel it back into the machine.

16.25

Maintaining the central lubrication unit

16.25.1

Distributor blocks of the central lubrication unit

1

4

2

3

RPG000-141

210

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Maintaining the central lubrication unit 16.25

The distributor blocks (1), (2), (3) and (4) of the central lubrication unit are located on the left machine side below the side hood.

(1) Distributor block intake

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

RPG000-138

Pos.

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

Designation

Pick-up rotor, right

Rotor bearing, right

Intermediate shaft pick-up drive, right

Guide wheel, right

Anti-twist lock, outside right

Pick-up rotor, left

Rotor bearing, left

Guide wheel, left

Anti-twist lock, inside

(2) Main distributor

2.1

2.2

2.4

2.3

RPG000-139

Pos.

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

Designation

Distributor block intake

Electric pump

Distributor block bale chamber B

Distributor block bale chamber A

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 211

16 Maintenance

16.25 Maintaining the central lubrication unit

(3) Distributor block bale chamber A

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

RP000-769

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

Pos.

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.9

3.10

LH RH

3.6

3.7

3.10

3.8

3.9

Designation

Bale formation conveyor drive, front right

Feed roller, top right

Feed roller, bottom right

Drive shaft, right

Starter roller, right

Bale formation conveyor drive, front left

Feed roller, top left

Feed roller, bottom left

Drive shaft, left

Starter roller, left

212

(4) Distributor block bale chamber B

4.2

4.1

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

RP000-772

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

Pos.

4.1

4.2

4.3

LH RH

4.7

4.8

4.9

4.10

4.11

4.12

Designation

Bale formation conveyor drive, rear right

Pivot tensioning rocker, rear right

Cylinder, right

Cylinder, right

Pivot tensioning rocker, right

Deflection, front right

Bale formation conveyor drive, rear left

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Pos.

4.8

4.9

4.10

4.11

4.12

Designation

Pivot tensioning rocker, rear left

Cylinder left side

Cylinder left side

Pivot tensioning rocker, left

Deflection, front left

Maintenance 16

Maintaining the central lubrication unit 16.25

16.25.2

Filling the lubricant tank

1

2

RPG000-143

The lubricant tank (1) is located on the left side of the machine behind the side hood. The lubricant tank (1) can be filled in 4 ways which are described in greater detail below:

1.

With a standard grease gun via the grease nipple (2)

2.

With a filling cylinder and filling connection (can be ordered via KRONE)

3.

With a manually or pneumatically operated grease gun via a screwed-in filler neck (can be ordered from KRONE) instead of a grease nipple (2)

4.

With a manually or pneumatically operated grease gun via a screwed-in coupling plug (can be ordered from KRONE) instead of a grease nipple (2)

Check filling level

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to lack of lubrication

If the machine is not adequately lubricated, the affected components will be damaged.

„ Ensure that the lubricant tank of central lubrication system is always adequately full.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Regularly perform a visual inspection of the lubricant tank to see whether there is still enough lubricant.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 213

16 Maintenance

16.25 Maintaining the central lubrication unit

1. Filling the lubricant tank via the grease nipple

1

214

2

RPG000-143

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Open the cover on the grease nipple (2).

„ Place the standard grease gun on the grease nipple (2) and fill the lubricant tank (1) with grease.

2. Filling lubricant tank using a filling cylinder

2

3

II

1 4 5

RPG000-193

A filling cylinder (3) and the matching filling connection (1) for the lubricant tank can be ordered by stating the following order numbers.

KRONE component

Filling cylinder (3)

Filling connection M20x1.5 (1)

Order number

00 940 393 *

00 940 392 *

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Mount the filling connection (1) on the lubricant tank at position (II).

„ Mount the components (6), (7), (8) and (9) as shown at position (II).

„ Open the filling cylinder (3) and insert a grease cartridge.

„ Open the protective cap on the filling connection (1) and the protective cap (4) of the filling cylinder (2).

„ Place the filling cylinder (3) on the filling connection (1) and push in grease using the handle

(5) in the lubricant tank.

„ After filling, position the filling cylinder (3) in the support behind the lubricant tank and secure with the linch pin (2).

For a list of suitable lubricants,

refer to page 44 .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

3. Filling the lubricant tank via a filler neck

Maintenance 16

Maintaining the central lubrication unit 16.25

I

1 2

RPG000-149

The lubricant tank can be filled by either a manually or pneumatically operated grease gun via a filler neck. The following components are required for this which can be ordered by stating the order numbers.

KRONE component

Filler neck (1)

Coupling sleeve (2)

Order number

27 001 594 *

27 001 595 *

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Remove the grease nipple at position (I).

„ Mount the components (1) and (2) as shown at position (I).

„ Connect the grease gun operated either manually or pneumatically to the coupling sleeve

(2) and fill the lubricant tank with lubricant.

For a list of suitable lubricants,

refer to page 44 .

4. Filling the lubricant tank via a coupling plug

I

1 2 3 4

RPG000-194

The lubricant tank can be filled by either a manually or pneumatically operated grease gun via a coupling plug. The following components are required for this which can be ordered by stating the order numbers.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 215

16 Maintenance

16.26 Servicing chain lubrication unit

KRONE component

Screw-in support (1)

Dust cap (2)

Coupling plug (3)

Coupling sleeve (4)

Order number

90 003 052 *

00 921 171 *

00 921 145 *

00 919 323 *

„ Remove the grease nipple at position (I).

„ Mount the components (1), (2), (3) and (4) as shown at position (I).

„ Connect the grease gun operated either manually or pneumatically to the coupling sleeve

(4) and fill the lubricant tank with lubricant.

For a list of suitable lubricants,

refer to page 44 .

16.26

Servicing chain lubrication unit

16.26.1

Checking oil level, topping up oil and cleaning filter

2

3

1

4

RPG000-134

1 Reservoir

2 Cover

3 Filter

4 Oil pump

Checking oil level and topping up oil

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Read off the oil level on the reservoir (1).

„ If the oil level is too low, remove the cover (2) and top up the oil via the opening.

For a list of oils, refer to page 44

.

„ Mount the cover (2).

Cleaning the filter

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü The reservoir (1) is mostly empty.

„ Remove the cover (2).

„ Remove the filter (3) from the reservoir (1).

„ Clean the filter (3).

216

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Servicing chain lubrication unit 16.26

„ Mount a clean filter (3).

„ Fill the reservoir (1) with oil.

„ Mount the cover (2).

16.26.2

Distribution of the oil brushes on the machine

The oil brushes of the central chain lubrication unit are distributed on the drive chains of the machine as followed.

Right side of machine

1.1

2

1.2

3

4.1

4.2

RPG000-145

1 1.1 Bale formation conveyor drive, rear

(1x)

1.2 Spur wheel drive (1x)

2 Starter roller drive (2x)

3 Intake drive (2x)

4 4.1 Pick-up drive (1x)

4.2 Pick-up drive/auger conveyor (1x)

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 217

16 Maintenance

16.27 Servicing compressed air brake (for version with "Compressed air brake")

Left side of machine

1

2

3

RPG000-144

1 Bale formation conveyor drive, front (2x)

2 Feed roller drive (1)

3 Pick-up drive/auger conveyor (1x)

16.27

Servicing compressed air brake (for version with "Compressed air brake")

16.27.1

Cleaning air filter

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

218

RP000-436

1 Air filter complete

2 Spring

3 Filter element

4 Spacer

5 Spring

6 Seal ring

7 Cover cap

8 Clasp locking ring

The air filters (1) clean the compressed air and guard the compressed air brake from malfunctions. The compressed air brake remains functional in both directions of flow even when a filter element (3) is blocked.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Servicing compressed air brake (for version with "Compressed air brake") 16.27

Removing filter element

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Remove the clasp locking ring (8).

„ Take out the cover cap (7).

„ Take out the seal ring (6).

„ Take out the spring (5).

„ Take out the spacer (4).

„ Take out the filter element (3) with the spring (2).

Cleaning air filter

ü

The filter element has been removed, refer to page 219 .

„ Blow out the intrior of the filter housing, the filter element and the remaining components with compressed air.

„ In the case of stubborn dirt, clean the components with water.

Installing filter element

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

„ Insert the filter element (3) with the spring (2).

„ Insert the spacer (4).

„ Insert the spring (5).

„ Insert the seal ring (6).

„ Insert the cover cap (7).

„ Mount the clasp locking ring (8).

16.27.2

Drain condensation water from the compressed air tank

WARNING

Risk of injury from corroded or damaged compressed air reservoirs

Damaged or corroded compressed air reservoirs may burst and cause serious injuries.

„

Observe the inspection intervals according to maintenance table, refer to page 182

.

„ Have damaged or corroded compressed air reservoirs replaced immediately by a specialist workshop.

NOTICE

Damage to compressed air reservoir caused by water in the compressor unit

Water in the compressor unit leads to corrosion which damages the compressed air reservoir.

„ Check and clean drain valve according to maintenance table,

refer to page 182

.

„ Immediately replace a defective drain valve.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 219

16 Maintenance

16.27 Servicing compressed air brake (for version with "Compressed air brake")

3

1

2

DVG000-014

The compressed-air reservoir stores the compressed air that is pumped by the compressor.

Condensation water may settle in the compressed air reservoir (1) during operation. The compressed-air reservoir (1) must be emptied regularly,

refer to page 182 .

The drain valve (2) is on the underside of the compressed air reservoir (1).

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Dismount the guard (3).

WARNING! Risk of eye injury due to spurting condensation water! Wear suitable protective goggles.

ü A suitable container is available for escaping condensation water.

„ Open the drain valve (2).

Æ Allow compressed air and condensation water to escape out of the compressed-air tank (1).

„ Visually inspect the drain valve (2) to ensure that it is not defective or soiled.

Æ If the drain valve (2) is defective and is no longer sealed, immediately have the drain valve (2) replaced by a KRONE service partner.

Æ If the drain valve (2) is soiled, clean the drain valve (2).

16.27.3

Retighten tensioning straps at the compressed air tank

For an overview of the tightening torques, refer to page 188

.

220

DVG000-015

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27 .

„ Check that the tensioning straps (1) are firmly attached.

If the compressed-air tank cannot be turned by hand, the tensioning straps (1) have been correctly set.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Servicing the hydraulic system 16.28

If the compressed-air tank can be turned by hand, the tensioning straps (1) must be retensioned.

„ To tension the tensioning straps (1), tighten the nuts (2).

16.28

Servicing the hydraulic system

WARNING

Hydraulic hoses are subject to ageing

Hydraulic hoses may wear depending on pressure, heat load and the effect of UV rays.

People can be seriously injured or killed by damaged hydraulic hoses.

The date of manufacture appears on the hydraulic hoses. This way the age can be ascertained quickly.

Replacement of the hydraulic hoses is recommended after a lifetime of six years.

„ Use original spare parts when replacing hoses.

NOTICE

Damage to the machine due to soiling of the hydraulic system

If foreign objects or liquids get into the hydraulic system, the hydraulic system may be severely damaged.

„ Clean hydraulic connections and components before removal.

„ Seal open hydraulic connections with protective caps.

„ Ensure that foreign objects or liquids do not get into the hydraulic system.

NOTICE

Storing and disposing of oils and used oil filters

If oil and used oil filters are not stored and disposed of properly, the environment may be damaged.

„ Store or dispose of used oil and oil filters according to statutory provisions.

16.28.1

Before working on the hydraulic system

The following steps must be performed before working on the hydraulic system to completely de-pressurise the hydraulic system:

„ Close the tailgate.

„ Reduce the baling pressure via the terminal in the menu "Electronic baling pressure setting" 

, refer to page 133 .

„

„Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 221

16 Maintenance

16.28 Servicing the hydraulic system

16.28.2

Solenoid valves

4

2

3

1

RP000-392

The solenoid valves (1) are located on the left side of the machine behind the side hood.

For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system": The solenoid valves (1) are located on the right side of the machine behind the side hood.

If the Comfort electronics fail, the solenoid valve (2) can be used to lift or lower the pick-up, and the solenoid valve (3) can be used to lift or lower the blade cassette in an emergency.

To lift or lower the pick-up or the blade cassette in an emergency:

WARNING! Risk of injury due to hot surfaces on solenoid valves and surrounding components! Wear protective gloves when the solenoid valves are being operated.

„ Screw in the corresponding knurled head screw (4) until the pick-up or the blade cassette can be lifted or lowered directly from the regulating valve on the tractor.

When the Comfort electronics are working properly again:

„ Unscrew the knurled head screws (4).

The pick-up and the blade cassette can be oeprated via the terminal.

16.28.3

Changing the hydraulic oil filter element

1

2

3

4

222

RPG000-076

The hydraulic oil filter (2) is located behind the side hood.

The hydraulic oil filter (2) absorbs deposits of solid particles from the hydraulic system. This can prevent damage to the components of the hydraulic circuit. The contamination indicator (1) provides visual information about the degree of contamination of the hydraulic oil filter.

Checking the hydraulic oil filter

„ Always check the contamination indicator (1) before use.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Maintenance 16

Servicing the hydraulic system 16.28

Display

Green

Red

Meaning

Filter element (3) adequately clean.

The filter element (3) must be changed.

If the cold contamination indicator (1) jumps out during start-up:

„ Wait until the operating temperature has been reached before pressing in the contamination indicator (1) again.

„ If the contamination indicator (1) immediately jumps out again, change the filter element (3) as follows.

Changing the filter element (3)

New filter elements can be ordered by quoting the order number 27 018 688*.

„ Depressurise the hydraulic system,

refer to page 221 .

„ Unscrew and clean the bottom part of the filter (4).

„ Remove the filter element (3).

„ Insert new filter element (3).

„ Check the O-ring seal on the filter element (3) and, if required, replace it with a new O-ring seal which has identical properties.

„ Screw the bottom part of the filter (4) onto the filter head.

„ Charge the hydraulic system with pressure and check it for leaks.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 223

17 Malfunction, cause and remedy

17.1

Disturbances at the pick-up or during picking up of crops

17 Malfunction, cause and remedy

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, refer to page 15 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 27

.

17.1

Disturbances at the pick-up or during picking up of crops

Malfunction: The pick-up cannot be lowered.

Possible cause

There was no switchover to pick-up on the terminal.

Remedy

The hydraulic hose has not been inserted in the tractor.

„ Pre-select pick-up on the terminal by pressing the  key.

„ Correctly connect the hydraulic hose for the pick-up,

page 57 .

refer to

The working height of the pick-up is set too high that the pick-up cannot be lowered.

„

Set the working height of the pick-up, refer to page 80

.

Malfunction: There are crop blockages in the intake area.

CAUTION! Machine damage due to crop blockages! Immediately stop, switch off PTO shaft and remove the crop blockages.

Possible cause

The swaths are uneven or too large.

Remedy

„ Divide the swaths.

The tractor driver is driving too fast.

„ Reduce the driving speed.

„ Slow down at the beginning of the baling process until the picked up crops roll into the bale chamber.

The machine height has not been set correctly with respect to the tractor.

„ Set the machine correctly using the drawbar from the

KRONE service partner, refer to page 48

.

The crop press roller unit has been set too low.

„

Set the crop press roller unit higher, refer to page 81

.

224

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

17.2

Malfunction, cause and remedy 17

Disturbances during or after the baling process 17.2

To remove the crop blockages, refer to page 96 .

Malfunction: Short crops are not correctly pulled in.

Possible cause

The machine is hooked in too low at the front.

Remedy

„ Check the setting of the drawbar.

„ If required, have the drawbar height adjusted by the KRONE service partner,

refer to page 48 .

Malfunction: Crops are conveyed upwards from the bale formation conveyor.

Possible cause

The density of the bale core has been set too solid.

Remedy

„ Adjust the density of the bale core,

refer to page 163

„ If required, reduce the baling pressure.

.

Disturbances during or after the baling process

Malfunction: The bale formation conveyor is rotating slower than it should. Slippage is occurring.

Possible cause

The baling pressure is too high.

The rotational speed is too high.

The sensor B01 "Speed of bale chamber" is defective.

The crops consist of very heavy grass without structure

(e.g. clover grass).

The crops consist of very heavy grass without structure

(e.g. clover grass).

Remedy

„

Reduce the baling pressure, refer to page 163

.

„

„

„

„

Reduce the rotatonal speed.

Check the sensor and the cabling for damage, page 232 .

refer to

Drive with few or no blades. To swivel out blade groups,

refer to page 84

.

Reduce the density of the bale core,

refer to page 163 .

Malfunction: Pressure does not build up.

Possible cause Remedy

No baling pressure is set in the terminal

„ Set the desired baling pressure in the terminal,

refer to page 133 .

Malfunction: The round bale does not roll, or only slowly, out of the bale chamber.

Possible cause

The sides have been filled too high.

Remedy

„ Make narrower swaths,

refer to page 69

.

„ Do not drive too far to the side.

The baling pressure is too high.

„

Lower the baling pressure, refer to page 163 .

Malfunction: The machine is running unevenly and the baling process in the bale chamber is difficult to start.

Possible cause

The density of the bale core is too high.

Remedy

„ Reduce the density of the bale core,

refer to page 163

„

Reduce the baling pressure, refer to page 163

.

.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 225

17 Malfunction, cause and remedy

17.2

Disturbances during or after the baling process

Malfunction: The tailgate cannot be completely closed.

Possible cause

The stop cock for the tailgate is closed.

The springs on the tailgate lock have been set too weak.

Remedy

„ Open the stop cock,

refer to page 76 .

„ Set the tailgate lock,

refer to page 256 .

Malfunction: The tailgate cannot be opened.

Possible cause

The hydraulic hose line for

"Opening/closing tailgate" has not been correctly connected.

Remedy

„ Connect the hydraulic hose line for "Opening/closing

tailgate", refer to page 57

.

Malfunction: The round bale is conically shaped.

Possible cause

The bale chamber is filled on one side.

Remedy

„

Fill the bale chamber evenly, refer to page 69

.

The tractor with machine was driven too quickly at the end of the baling process.

„ Slow down at the end of the baling process.

Net wrapping: The number of net layers is too low.

„

Increase the number of net layers via the terminal, refer to page 130 .

The wrapping material is torn.

„ Use only wrapping material of the designated quality.

KRONE recommends one of the "KRONE excellent" products, see label on the machine with the number

27 016 326 *.

Malfunction: The round bale is barrel-shaped. This causes the wrapping material to tear open in the middle.

Possible cause

The bale chamber is filled unevenly.

The wrapping material brake has been set too forcefully.

Remedy

„ Drive over the swath on alternate sides,

refer to page 69

The number of layers of wrapping material is too low.

„ Increase the number of layers.

Net wrapping: refer to page 130

.

Chamber film wrapping:

refer to page 130

„ Adjust the wrapping material brake,

refer to page 170 .

.

226

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

17.3

Malfunction, cause and remedy 17

Disturbances at the tying unit or during the tying cycle 17.3

Disturbances at the tying unit or during the tying cycle

Malfunction: The wrapping material (net or film) stops when tying is activated. The wrapping material tears after tying starts or during the tying process.

With this fault an error message is displayed on the terminal.

Possible cause

The wrapping material brake has been set too forcefully.

Remedy

„ Check and adjust the wrapping material brake,

refer to page 170 .

„ Check whether the claws on the brake disc are functional and whether, as a result, the cardboard tube of the net roll is held properly in place.

The cutting unit has fallen into the net.

„ Remove deposits from the cutting unit.

„ Check the setting of the cutting unit.

The cutting unit is not engaged.

„ Check whether the cutting unit is engaged/clamped during the feed process.

The cutting unit has been set too deep.

The rotational speed is too high.

„ Check the rotational speed. It must not be higher than 540 rpm.

Malfunction: The wrapping material (net or film) is not transported directly after tying starts.

With this fault an error message is displayed on the terminal.

Possible cause

The wrapping material roll is empty.

Remedy

„ Change the wrapping material roll.

For "Net wrapping" version:

refer to page 87 .

For "Net and film wrapping" version refer to page 90

.

The wrapping material roll has the wrong dimensions.

„ Only use wrapping material rolls with the prescribed dimensions,

refer to page 42

.

The wrapping material roll has not been correctly inserted into the roll holder.

„ Insert the wrapping material roll according to the description.

For "Net wrapping" version:

refer to page 87 .

For "Net and film wrapping" version:

refer to page 90 .

The wrapping material has not been correctly inserted.

„ Insert the wrapping material according to the description.

For "Net wrapping" version:

refer to page 89 .

For "Net and film wrapping" version:

refer to page 91 .

The wrapping material overhang is too short.

The wrapping material brake does not release.

„ Check the wrapping material overhang. Ensure that it is at least 250 mm.

„ If the wrapping material overhang is too short, adjust the

wire rope, refer to page 169 .

„ Adjust the wrapping material brake,

refer to page 170 .

„ Check the axial play of the wrapping material brake,

refer to page 210 .

The brake force release has not been set correctly.

„ Check and set the brake force release during the feed

process, refer to page 172

.

„ Check the sensor B02 "Tying process active".

The wrapping material is pulled earlier even though the feed rocker arm is not yet in the feed position.

„ Check the sensor B61 "Tying 1 (passive)" and set the feed

position, refer to page 166 .

The rotational speed is too high.

„ Check the rotational speed. It must not be higher than 540 rpm.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 227

17 Malfunction, cause and remedy

17.3

Disturbances at the tying unit or during the tying cycle

Malfunction: The net is not transported after tying starts.

Possible cause Remedy

Malfunction: The wrapping material (net or film) is not, or not cleanly, cut.

With this fault an error message is displayed on the terminal.

Possible cause

The cutting unit is blunt.

The cutting unit is not actuated.

Remedy

„ Remove deposits from the cutting unit.

„ If required, have the cutting unit replaced by a KRONE service partner.

„ Remove deposits from the cutting unit.

„ Check that the blade lever rotates.

„ Check and adjust the wrapping material overhang,

refer to page 169 .

The actuator for wrapping process is defective.

„ Check the actuator for wrapping process.

The ratchet on the cutting unit does not move upwards.

„ Check the wire rope on the cutting unit and, if required, shorten.

Malfunction: The wrapping material (net or film) is damaged during the tying process.

Possible cause

There are deposits or minor damage on the machine components, the sharp edges of which damage the wrapping material.

Remedy

„ Check and clean the components along the path of the wrapping material.

„ Remove sharp edges from along the path of the wrapping material.

„ If the malfunction persists, contact the KRONE service partner.

Malfunction: The wrapping material (net or film) does not, or not completely, cover one or both of the outer edges.

Possible cause

The wrapping material (net or film) is not correctly braked during the tying cycle.

Remedy

„ Adjust the wrapping material brake,

refer to page 170 .

The wrapping material (net or film) has become caught on the blade of the cutting unit.

„ Check the setting of the cutting unit.

The net or film roll is not centrally aligned with the machine.

„ Correctly insert the net or film roll and centrally align with the machine.

For version with "Net wrapping":

refer to page 87

For version with "Net and chamber film wrapping":

refer to page 90 .

„ Remove crop soiling from the scraper or the tying unit.

There is a blockage in the outer area of the wrapping material path.

228

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

17.4

Malfunction, cause and remedy 17

Malfunctions on the chain lubrication unit 17.4

Malfunction: The wrapping material (net or film) tears when the net roll or film roll diameter is reduced.

Possible cause

The wrapping material brake has not been correctly set.

Remedy

„ Adjust the wrapping material brake,

refer to page 170 .

Malfunction: For "Version with net wrapping and chamber film wrapping" and activated chamber film wrapping: The film wraps around the spiral roller.

Possible cause

The distance between the scraper rail, including scraper reinforcers and the spiral roller, is too large.

Remedy

„ Set the scraper to the spiral roller,

refer to page 198

Malfunction: For "Version with net wrapping and chamber film wrapping" and activated chamber film wrapping: The film wraps around the upper compression roller.

Possible cause

The crop holding fixture was stopped too early.

The upper compression roller has sharp edges.

Remedy

„ After the tying process starts, pick up crops until the film is caught by the round bale and the film roll is rotating.

„ Remove the sharp edges.

Malfunctions on the chain lubrication unit

Malfunction: The oil consumption is too low.

Possible cause

The oil quantities have been set too low. Too little oil comes from the brushes on the central chain lubrication

unit, refer to page 217

.

The oil is too thick.

The central chain lubrication system is contaminated.

Remedy

„ Set the oil quantities on the affected drive chains higher,

refer to page 180 .

„

„

Use recommended oil,

refer to page 44 .

Clean the entire central chain lubrication system.

Malfunction: The oil consumption is too high.

Possible cause

The oil quantities are set too high. Too much oil comes from the brushes on the central chain lubrication unit,

refer to page 217 .

The oil is too thin.

Remedy

„ Set the oil quantities on the affected drive chains lower,

refer to page 180 .

„ Use recommended oil,

refer to page 44 .

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 229

17 Malfunction, cause and remedy

17.5

Faults of the electrics/electronics

Malfunction: The oil pump is dry.

Possible cause

There is no pressure. The oil pump is not conveying.

There is no pressure. The system has no oil.

The system is blocked by deposits.

Remedy

„ Have the oil pump dismounted and cleaned or replaced by a

KRONE service partner.

„

Check the oil level and top up, refer to page 216 .

„

Clean the filter, refer to page 216 .

„ Clean the entire central chain lubrication system.

Malfunction: The oil pump is not pressed for the complete stroke.

Possible cause

The oil is too thick.

Remedy

„ Use recommended oil,

refer to page 44 .

17.5

17.5.1

Faults of the electrics/electronics

Error Messages

WARNING

Personal injuries and/or machine damage caused by non-compliance of error messages

If error messages are ignored and the malfunction is not remedied, people may be injured and/or the machine may be damaged seriously.

„

Remedy the malfunction when the error message is displayed, refer to page 233

.

„ If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact KRONE Customer Service.

KMC - 521202- 5

B11

L

EQG000-034

The display shows an error message if a malfunction occurs on the machine. At the same time, an audio signal will be heard (continuous horn sound). Description of malfunction, possible cause and remedy,

refer to page 233

.

230

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Malfunction, cause and remedy 17

Faults of the electrics/electronics 17.5

Configuration of an error message

The error message is configured according to the following sample: e.g. error message

"520192-19 CAN1 "

520192 19

SPN (Suspect Parameter

Number) = error number

FMI = type of error, refer to page 231

CAN1

Icon

Acknowledging error message

„ Note down the error message.

„ Briefly press on .

Æ The acoustic signal stops and the error display is no longer indicated. If the fault occurs again, the error message will be displayed again.

„ To acknowledge the error message until the operating terminal is next started, press and hold down the  key for 5 seconds.

„ Rectify the error,

refer to page 233

.

Acknowledge and still pending error messages can be displayed again via the status line, refer to page 107

.

17.5.1.1

Possible error types (FMI)

There are different types of errors which are shown under the term FMI (Failure Mode

Identification) with an appropriate code.

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

FMI

0

1

Meaning

The upper limit value was greatly exceeded.

The lower limit value was far below the required one.

The data is not permitted.

There is an overvoltage or a short circuit to supply voltage.

There is an undervoltage or a short circuit to ground.

A cable is broken or amperage is too low.

There is a short circuit to ground or amperage is too low.

The mechanics do not respond or the expected result was not achieved.

The frequency is not permitted.

There is an abnormal update rate.

There is an abnormal rate of change.

The error cause is unknown.

There is an internal error.

The values of the calibration are outside the value range.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 231

17 Malfunction, cause and remedy

17.5

Faults of the electrics/electronics

20

21

31

16

17

18

19

FMI

14

15

Meaning

Particular instructions are required.

The upper limit value has been reached.

The upper limit value has been exceeded.

The lower limit value has been reached.

The lower limit value has not been reached.

There is a CAN communication failure.

The data deviates upwards.

The data deviates downwards.

The condition has been fulfilled.

17.5.2

Overview of fuses

The circuit board with the fuses is located on the right side of the machine behind the side hood.

As indicated on the circuit diagram, the following fuses are on the circuit board:

RPG000-080

Designation

A1.F1

A1.F2

A1.F3

A1.F4

A1.F5

A1.F6

Explanation

Reserve 15 A

KMC A10 PWR UB1 15 A

KMC A10 PWR UB2 15 A

Reserve 15 A

ISOBUS-expansion PWR 15 A

Reserve 15 A

Designation

A1.F7

A1.F8

A1.F9

A1.F10

A1.F11

Explanation

PWR plug X551 15 A

KMB A30 / A31 PWR UB 5 A

KMC A10 ECU_PWR 7.5 A

ISOBUS-expansion ECU PWR

7.5 A

ECU plug X551 7.5 A

17.5.3

Remedying sensor/actuator error

Components must be repaired or replaced by a qualified specialist workshop only.

232

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

17.5.4

Malfunction, cause and remedy 17

Faults of the electrics/electronics 17.5

Before contacting the dealer, collect the following information about the error message:

„

Note the error number and the respective FMI ( refer to page 231 ) that are shown on the

display.

„

Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to page 27

.

„ Check sensor/actuator externally for damage.

Æ If the sensor/actuator is damaged, replace the sensor/actuator.

Æ If the sensor/actuator is not damaged, continue with the next test step.

„ Check connector cable and plug connection for damage and tightness.

Æ If the connector cable/plug connection is damaged, replace the connector cable/plug connection.

Æ If the sensor/actuator is not damaged, continue with the next test step.

„ Perform an actuator test in case of an actuator error to identify the actuator status,

refer to page 151

.

„

If a sensor is defective, run a sensor test to identify the sensor status, refer to page 147 .

The more information the dealer has, the easier it is to eliminate the cause of the error.

Error list

>>>

2

Fehlerliste_D2515020105300016_en [ }  234]

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 233

Error list

Software version: D2515020105400018_300

Control unit: KMC

Page 1

Error number

KMC-520192-19

Error text

CAN1 - CAN disturbance between control units

KMC-520193-19 CAN2 - CAN disturbance between control units

KMC-520194-19 CAN3 - CAN disturbance between control units

KMC-520195-19 CAN4 - CAN disturbance between control units

KMC-520198-12 Control unit - Internal Error

KMC-520232-12

KMC-520234-31

KMC-521100-3

KMC-521100-4

KMC-521100-5

KMC-521100-6

KMC-521101-3

KMC-521101-4

KMC-521101-5

KMC-521101-6

KMC-521102-3

Vehicle Identification Number -

Internal Error

System check with KMC failed -

Condition is available

Voltage group UB1 - Overvoltage

Voltage group UB1 - Undervoltage detected

Voltage group UB1 - Ground fault

Voltage group UB1 - Overload

Voltage group UB2 - Overvoltage

Voltage group UB2 - Undervoltage detected

Voltage group UB2 - Ground fault

Voltage group UB2 - Overload

Voltage group UB3 - Overvoltage

Description

There is a CAN disturbance between control units on CAN 1.

Figure

There is a CAN disturbance between control units on CAN 2.

There is a CAN disturbance between control units on CAN 3.

There is a CAN disturbance between control units on CAN 4.

An internal error in the control unit which was actuated by defective software or hardware.

The vehicle identification number has not been initialised.

With the KMC the cross-controller adjustment of system-relevant machine data has failed.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too high.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too low.

A ground fault has occurred on the supply voltage.

The maximum load on the supply voltage has been exceeded.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too high.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too low.

The maximum load on the supply voltage has been exceeded.

The maximum load on the supply voltage has been exceeded.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too high.

Page 2

Error number

KMC-521102-4

KMC-521102-5

KMC-521102-6

KMC-521103-3

Error text

Voltage group UB3 - Undervoltage detected

Voltage group UB3 - Ground fault

KMC-521103-4

KMC-521103-5

Voltage group UB4 - Undervoltage detected

Voltage group UB4 - Ground fault

KMC-521103-6

KMC-521104-3

KMC-521104-4

KMC-521104-5

KMC-521104-6

KMC-521105-3

KMC-521105-4

KMC-521105-5

KMC-521105-6

KMC-521106-11

Voltage group UB3 - Overload

Voltage group UB4 - Overvoltage

Voltage group UB4 - Overload

Voltage group UB5 - Overvoltage

Voltage group UB5 - Undervoltage detected

Voltage group UB5 - Ground fault

Voltage group UB5 - Overload

Voltage group UB6 - Overvoltage

Voltage group UB6 - Undervoltage detected

Voltage group UB6 - Ground fault

Voltage group UB6 - Overload

Supply voltage sensors - General disturbance

Description

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too low.

Figure

A ground fault has occurred on the supply voltage.

The maximum load on the supply voltage has been exceeded.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too high.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too low.

A ground fault has occurred on the supply voltage.

The maximum load on the supply voltage has been exceeded.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too high.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too low.

A ground fault has occurred on the supply voltage.

The maximum load on the supply voltage has been exceeded.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too high.

The input voltage of the corresponding voltage group is too low.

A ground fault has occurred on the supply voltage.

The maximum load on the supply voltage has been exceeded.

The voltage has been switched off due to an overload or a short circuit on the supply voltage of the sensors.

Page 3

Error number

KMC-521107-3

KMC-521107-4 Supply voltage - Undervoltage detected

KMC-521108-11 Control unit - General disturbance

KMC-521109-11

KMC-521110-11

KMC-521111-11

KMC-521112-11

Error text

Supply voltage - Overvoltage

Control unit - General disturbance

Control unit - General disturbance

Control unit - General disturbance

Control unit - General disturbance

Description

The power supply on the UE connection is too high.

The power supply on the UE connection is too low.

The voltage group relay UB1 has not passed the self-test.

Figure

The voltage group relay UB2 has not passed the self-test.

The voltage group relay UB3 has not passed the self-test.

The voltage group relay UB4 has not passed the self-test.

The voltage group relay UB5 has not passed the self-test.

KMC-521113-11 Control unit - General disturbance The voltage group relay UB6 has not passed the self-test.

KMC-521114-11

KMC-521115-11

KMC-521116-11

KMC-521117-11

KMC-521118-11

KMC-521320-2

Sensor supply voltage U1 - General disturbance

Sensor supply voltage U2 - General disturbance

Sensor supply voltage U3 - General disturbance

Sensor supply voltage U4 - General disturbance

Voltage group relay UB2 - General disturbance

Machine configuration - Logic error electronics

The voltage group Uext1 for supplying the sensors is defective, for example due to overload or short circuit.

The voltage group Uext2 for supplying the sensors is defective, for example due to overload or short circuit.

The voltage group Uext3 for supplying the sensors is defective, for example due to overload or short circuit.

The voltage group Uext4 for supplying the sensors is defective, for example due to overload or short circuit.

Platform error only for BiG X: A disturbance has been detected at the intake/header. Therefore the voltage group relay UB2 was switched off.

Configuration of the machine is not compatible with the hardware.

KMC-521350-11 Control unit - General disturbance

KMC-521351-11 Control unit - General disturbance

Page 4

Error number

KMC-522000-7

KMC-522001-7

KMC-522005-2

Error text

Quick-stop switch - Logic fault mechanics

Description

The quick-stop switch has been activated.

Quick-stop retaining bracket - Logic fault mechanics

The quick-stop retaining bracket has been activated.

Universal shaft - Logic error electronics

The universal shaft rotates and the operating status is road mode.

Figure

KMC-522005-16 Universal shaft - Upper limit value exceeded

KMC-522010-7 Blade cassette movement prompt -

Logic fault mechanics

The universal shaft is rotating faster than permitted.

The blade cassette must be lifted.

KMC-522011-7

KMC-522012-7

Blade cassette movement prompt -

Logic fault mechanics

The blade cassette must be lowered.

Blade cassette not up - Logic fault mechanics

The blade cassette is not up.

KMC-522014-7

KMC-522015-7

Blade cassette movement prompt -

Logic fault mechanics

The blade cassette must be pressurised.

Blade cassette Timeout - Logic fault mechanics

Movement of the blade cassette has a timeout.

KMC-522020-7

KMC-522021-7

KMC-522022-7

KMC-522023-18

KMC-522024-7

Tying net not pulled - Logic fault mechanics

Tying net stopped - Logic fault mechanics

Tying net is being pulled - Logic fault mechanics

Feed roller below minimum speed -

Lower limit value below minimum

Tying net not cut off - Logic fault mechanics

The wrapping and tying material was not received by/pulled from the bale when tying is activated.

The wrapping and tying material stops after a certain time when tying is activated.

The wrapping and tying material is being pulled from the bale even though tying has not started.

The feed roller is below the minimum speed when the wrapping and tying material is pulled.

The wrapping and tying material has not been cut off.

KMC-522025-7

KMC-522026-7

Tying net not pulled - Logic fault mechanics

Tying net stopped - Logic fault mechanics

The wrapping and tying material was not received by/pulled from the bale when tying is activated.

The wrapping and tying material stops after a certain time when tying is activated.

Page 5

Error number

KMC-522027-7

KMC-522028-7

Error text

Tying net is being pulled - Logic fault mechanics

Tying net not cut off - Logic fault mechanics

Description

The wrapping and tying material is being pulled from the bale even though tying has not started.

The wrapping and tying material has not been cut off.

Figure

KMC-522029-7

KMC-522030-7

KMC-522031-7

KMC-522033-7

Tying twine not pulled - Logic fault mechanics

Tying twine stopped - Logic fault mechanics

Tying twine is being pulled - Logic fault mechanics

KMC-522032-18 Feed roller below minimum speed -

Lower limit value below minimum

Tying twine not cut off - Logic fault mechanics

The wrapping and tying material was not received by/pulled from the bale when tying is activated.

The wrapping and tying material stops after a certain time when tying is activated.

The wrapping and tying material is being pulled from the bale even though tying has not started.

The feed roller is below the minimum speed when the wrapping and tying material is pulled.

The wrapping and tying material has not been cut off.

KMC-522034-7 Tying twine Timeout - Logic fault mechanics

KMC-522035-16 Maximum filling exceeded - Upper limit value exceeded

KMC-522038-18

KMC-522040-16

KMC-522041-16

KMC-522044-7

Slip of bale formation conveyor -

Lower limit value below minimum

Left bale conical - Upper limit value exceeded

Right bale conical - Upper limit value exceeded

Position of tailgate unclear - Logic fault mechanics

The setpoint speed of the bale formation conveyor of the bale chamber was below the minimum.

The filling between the left and right sides of the bale differs too much, too large on the left.

The filling between the left and right sides of the bale differs too much, too large on the right.

The position of the tailgate could not be determined.

KMC-522045-7

The twine arms could not be moved within the stipulated time into the required position.

The bale chamber has been filled above the maximum.

KMC-522046-7

Open tailgate Timeout - Logic fault mechanics

Close tailgate Timeout - Logic fault mechanics

The tailgate could not be opened within the stipulated time.

The tailgate could not be closed within the stipulated time.

KMC-522048-7 Tailgate open - Logic fault mechanics The tailgate is open during road operating mode.

Page 6

Error number

KMC-522049-7

KMC-522050-18

Error text Description

Tailgate open - Logic fault mechanics An open tailgate was detected, although no tying has occurred since it was last closed.

Figure

Rotational speed universal shaft -

Lower limit value below minimum

The PTO speed is too low.

KMC-522051-7 Position of tailgate - Logic fault mechanics

The position of the tailgate is not correct.

KMC-522052-7

KMC-522053-7

Position of lifter - Logic fault mechanics

The position of the lifter is not correct.

Position wrapping table - Logic fault mechanics

The position of the wrapping table is not correct.

KMC-522054-7

KMC-522055-7

Position wrapping arm - Logic fault mechanics

The position of the wrapping arm is not correct.

Position of holding arms - Logic fault mechanics

The position of the holding arm is not correct.

KMC-522056-7

KMC-522057-7

Transfer Timeout - Logic fault mechanics

The transfer has a timeout.

Bale on lifter - Logic fault mechanics The bale is not on the lifter.

KMC-522058-7

KMC-522060-7

Bale on wrapping table - Logic fault mechanics

There is a bale on the wrapping table.

Tailgate automatic system Timeout -

Logic fault mechanics

The tailgate automatic system has a

Timeout

KMC-522066-7

KMC-522070-7

KMC-522075-7

KMC-522076-7

Lifter Timeout - Logic fault mechanics The lifter of the bale transfer could not be moved within the stipulated time into the required position.

Wrapping table Timeout - Logic fault mechanics

The wrapping table could not be moved within the stipulated time into the required position.

Film tear on one side - Logic fault mechanics

The film is torn on one side.

Film tear on both sides - Logic fault mechanics

The film is torn on both sides.

KMC-522078-16 Moisture measurement - Upper limit value exceeded

The upper moisture limit value was below the minimum during the moisture measurement.

Page 7

Error number

KMC-522079-18

KMC-522080-7

KMC-522081-7

KMC-522082-7

KMC-522083-7

Error text

Moisture measurement - Lower limit value below minimum

Tying film not pulled - Logic fault mechanics

Tying film stopped - Logic fault mechanics

Tying film is being pulled - Logic fault mechanics

Tying film not cut off - Logic fault mechanics

Description

The lower moisture limit value was below the minimum during the moisture measurement.

The wrapping and tying material was not received by/pulled from the bale when tying is activated.

The wrapping and tying material stops after a certain time when tying is activated.

The wrapping and tying material is being pulled from the bale even though tying has not started.

The wrapping and tying material has not been cut off.

Figure

KMC-522084-7

KMC-522085-7

KMC-522086-7

KMC-522087-7

Tying twine not pulled - Logic fault mechanics

Tying twine stopped - Logic fault mechanics

Tying twine is being pulled - Logic fault mechanics

Tying twine not cut off - Logic fault mechanics

The wrapping and tying material was not received by/pulled from the bale when tying is activated.

The wrapping and tying material stops after a certain time when tying is activated.

The wrapping and tying material is being pulled from the bale even though tying has not started.

The wrapping and tying material has not been cut off.

KMC-522090-7 Lubrication flow interrupted - Logic fault mechanics

KMC-522091-18 Baling pressure below minimum -

Lower limit value below minimum

KMC-522093-7

KMC-522094-7

During active lubrication no lubrication flow was detected.

The baling pressure is below the minimum required value

Position of tailgate Combi unclear -

Logic fault mechanics

The position of the tailgate could not be determined.

Open tailgate Combi Timeout - Logic fault mechanics

The tailgate could not be opened within the stipulated time.

KMC-522094-7

KMC-522097-7

KMC-522098-7

Open tailgate Combi Timeout - Logic fault mechanics

The tailgate could not be closed within the stipulated time.

Tailgate Combi open - Logic fault mechanics

The tailgate is open during road operating mode.

Tailgate Combi open - Logic fault mechanics

An open tailgate was detected, although no tying has occurred since it was last closed.

Page 8

Error number

KMC-522101-3

Error text

Sensor B01 Speed of bale chamber -

Cable break

Description

KMC-522101-4

KMC-522102-3

Sensor B01 Speed of bale chamber -

Short circuit to ground or UB

Sensor B02 Tying process active -

Cable break

KMC-522102-4

KMC-522103-3

Sensor B02 Tying process active -

Short circuit to ground or UB

Sensor B74 Acceleration wrapping table - Cable break

KMC-522103-4

KMC-522105-3

Sensor B74 Acceleration wrapping table - Short circuit to ground or UB

Sensor B05 Slip of bale formation conveyor - Cable break

KMC-522105-4

KMC-522106-3

Sensor B05 Slip of bale formation conveyor - Short circuit to ground or

UB

Sensor B06 Tying process active 1 twine tying - Cable break

KMC-522106-4

KMC-522107-3

Sensor B06 Tying process active 1 twine tying - Short circuit to ground or UB

Sensor B07 Tying process active 2 twine tying - Cable break

KMC-522107-4

KMC-522108-3

Sensor B07 Tying process active 2 twine tying - Short circuit to ground or UB

Sensor B08 Bale chute top - Cable break

KMC-522108-4

KMC-522109-3

Sensor B08 Bale chute top - Short circuit to ground or UB

Sensor B09 Filling display on left -

Short circuit after UB

KMC-522109-4 Sensor B09 Filling display on left -

Cable break or short circuit to ground

Figure

Page 9

Error number

KMC-522110-3

KMC-522110-4

KMC-522111-3

KMC-522111-4

KMC-522112-3

KMC-522112-4

KMC-522113-3

Error text

Sensor B10 Filling display on right -

Short circuit after UB

Description

Sensor B10 Filling display on right -

Cable break or short circuit to ground

Sensor B11 Lock hook bale chamber on left - Cable break

Sensor B11 Lock hook bale chamber on left - Short circuit to ground or UB

Sensor B12 Lock hook bale chamber on right - Cable break

Sensor B12 Lock hook bale chamber on right - Short circuit to ground or

UB

Sensor B13 Position of twine guide slide - Cable break

KMC-522113-4

KMC-522114-3

KMC-522115-3

KMC-522115-4

Sensor B13 Position of twine guide slide - Short circuit to ground or UB

Sensor B14 Bale chamber open -

Cable break

Sensor B15 Ejecting the bale - Cable break

Sensor B15 Ejecting the bale - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522120-3

KMC-522120-4

Sensor B20 Zero position wrapping arm - Cable break

Sensor B20 Zero position wrapping arm - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522121-3

KMC-522121-4

Sensor B21 Position wrapping arm -

Cable break

Sensor B21 Position wrapping arm -

Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522122-3 Sensor B22 Left holding arm open -

Cable break

Figure

Error number

KMC-522122-4

Error text

Sensor B22 Left holding arm open -

Short circuit to ground or UB

Description

KMC-522123-3

KMC-522123-4

Sensor B23 Right holding arm open -

Cable break

Sensor B23 Right holding arm open -

Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522124-3

KMC-522124-4

Sensor B24 Film tear detection -

Cable break

Sensor B24 Film tear detection -

Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522126-3

KMC-522126-4

Sensor B26 Bale lifter down - Cable break

Sensor B26 Bale lifter down - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522127-3

KMC-522127-4

Sensor B27 Position wrapping table -

Short circuit after UB

Sensor B27 Position wrapping table -

Cable break or short circuit to ground

KMC-522135-3

KMC-522135-4

Sensor B35 Left holding arm closed -

Cable break

Sensor B35 Left holding arm closed -

Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522136-3

KMC-522136-4

Sensor B36 Right holding arm closed

- Cable break

Sensor B36 Right holding arm closed

- Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522140-3

KMC-522140-4

Sensor B40 Blade group B swivelled out - Cable break

Sensor B40 Blade group B swivelled out - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522141-3 Sensor B41 Blade group B swivelled in - Cable break

Page 10

Figure

Error number

KMC-522141-4

Error text

Sensor B41 Blade group B swivelled in - Short circuit to ground or UB

Description

KMC-522142-3

KMC-522142-4

Sensor B42 Blade group A swivelled out - Cable break

Sensor B42 Blade group A swivelled out - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522143-3

KMC-522143-4

Sensor B43 Blade group A swivelled in - Cable break

Sensor B43 Blade group A swivelled in - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522146-3

KMC-522146-4

Sensor B46 Blade control shaft 0 -

Cable break

Sensor B46 Blade control shaft 0 -

Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522147-3

KMC-522147-4

Sensor B47 Blade control shaft 1 -

Cable break

Sensor B47 Blade control shaft 1 -

Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522150-3

KMC-522150-4

KMC-522151-3

KMC-522151-4

Sensor B50 Bale detection wrapping table - Short circuit after UB

Sensor B50 Bale detection wrapping table - Cable break or short circuit to ground

Sensor B09 Filling display on left -

Short circuit after UB

Sensor B09 Filling display on left -

Cable break or short circuit to ground

KMC-522152-3

KMC-522152-4

Sensor B10 Filling display on right -

Short circuit after UB

Sensor B10 Filling display on right -

Cable break or short circuit to ground

KMC-522161-3 Sensor B61 Tying 1 (passive) - Short circuit after UB

Page 11

Figure

Error number

KMC-522161-4

Error text

Sensor B61 Tying 1 (passive) - Cable break or short circuit to ground

Description

KMC-522162-3

KMC-522162-4

Sensor B62 Tying 2 (active) - Cable break

Sensor B62 Tying 2 (active) - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522163-3

KMC-522163-4

Sensor B63 Tying 3 (active) (twine) -

Short circuit after UB

Sensor B63 Tying 3 (active) (twine) -

Cable break or short circuit to ground

KMC-522165-3

KMC-522165-4

Sensor B65 Base coat film packer closed - Cable break

Sensor B65 Base coat film packer closed - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522166-3

KMC-522166-4

Sensor B66 Base coat film packer open - Cable break

Sensor B66 Base coat film packer open - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522167-3

KMC-522167-4

Sensor B67 Blade pre-selection active - Cable break

Sensor B67 Blade pre-selection active - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522168-3

KMC-522168-4

KMC-522169-3

KMC-522169-4

Sensor B68 Blade pre-selection inactive - Cable break

Sensor B68 Blade pre-selection inactive - Short circuit to ground or

UB

Sensor B69 blade active - Cable break

Sensor B69 blade active - Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522177-3 Sensor B77 Bale lifter position -

Short circuit after UB

Page 12

Figure

Error number

KMC-522177-4

Error text

Sensor B77 Bale lifter position -

Cable break or short circuit to ground

Description

KMC-522182-3

KMC-522182-4

Sensor B82 Direction display - Short circuit after UB

Sensor B82 Direction display -

Cable break or short circuit to ground

KMC-522183-3

KMC-522183-4

Sensor B83 Overload protection belt

- Cable break

Sensor B83 Overload protection belt

- Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522184-3

KMC-522184-4

Sensor B84 Baling pressure - Short circuit after UB

Sensor B84 Baling pressure - Cable break or short circuit to ground

KMC-522202-3

KMC-522202-4

Sensor B02 Tying process active -

Cable break

Sensor B02 Tying process active -

Short circuit to ground or UB

KMC-522206-3

KMC-522206-4

KMC-522244-0

KMC-522244-0

Sensor B06 Tying process active 1 twine tying - Cable break

Sensor B06 Tying process active 1 twine tying - Short circuit to ground or UB

Switch/momentary switch S4

Loosen holding arm -

Switch/momentary switch S4

Loosen holding arm -

KMC-522245-3

KMC-522245-4

Momentary switch S5 tying insert net

Switch/momentary switch S5 Tying insert net - Cable break

Momentary switch S5 tying insert net

Switch/momentary switch S5 Tying insert net - Short circuit to ground or

UB

Page 13

Figure

Error number

KMC-522250-16

KMC-522250-18

KMC-522251-16

KMC-522251-18

KMC-522300-3

Error text

Sensor

- B58 Weight measurement wrapping table at rear right

- B59 Weight measurement wrapping table at front left

- Upper limit value exceeded

Sensor

- B58 Weight measurement wrapping table at rear right

- B59 Weight measurement wrapping table at front left

- Lower limit value below minimum

Sensor

- B57 Weight measurement wrapping table at rear left

- B60 Weight measurement wrapping table at front right

- Upper limit value exceeded

Sensor

- B57 Weight measurement wrapping table at rear left

- B60 Weight measurement wrapping table at front right

- Lower limit value below minimum

Engine M1 Tying 1 (passive) net -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Description

KMC-522300-6

KMC-522301-3

KMC-522301-6

KMC-522303-3

KMC-522303-6

KMC-522305-3

Engine M1 Tying 1 (passive) net -

Short Cut to Ground

Actuator K01/K20 Pick-up/blade group control system B - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K01/K20 Pick-up/blade group control system B - Short Cut to Ground

Actuator K03/K21 Blade cassette/ blade group control system A - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K03/K21 Blade cassette/ blade group control system A - Short

Cut to Ground

Actuator K05 Circulation valve block -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

KMC-522305-6

KMC-522306-3

Actuator K05 Circulation valve block -

Short Cut to Ground

Actuator Q06 Drive wrapping arm -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Page 14

Figure

Error number

KMC-522306-6

Error text

Actuator Q06 Drive wrapping arm -

Short Cut to Ground

Description

KMC-522307-3

KMC-522307-6

Actuator K07 Close bale chamber -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K07 Close bale chamber -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522308-3

KMC-522308-6

Actuator K08 Open bale chamber -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K08 Open bale chamber -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522310-3

KMC-522310-6

Actuator K10 Bale transfer wrapping table - Cable break or short circuit to

UB

Actuator K10 Bale transfer wrapping table - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522311-3

KMC-522311-6

KMC-522312-3

KMC-522312-6

Actuator K11 Move bale turner -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K11 Move bale turner -

Short Cut to Ground

Actuator K12 Raise bale transfer -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K12 Raise bale transfer -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522313-3

KMC-522313-6

Actuator K13 Lower bale transfer -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K13 Lower bale transfer -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522314-3

KMC-522314-6

Actuator K14 Speed of wrapping table film tear - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K14 Speed of wrapping table film tear - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522316-3 Actuator K16 Open holding arms -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Page 15

Figure

Error number

KMC-522316-6

Error text

Actuator K16 Open holding arms -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522317-3

KMC-522317-6

Actuator K17 Close holding arms -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K17 Close holding arms -

Short Cut to Ground

Description

KMC-522319-3

KMC-522319-6

Actuator K19 Wrapping arm brake -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K19 Wrapping arm brake -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522320-3

KMC-522320-6

KMC-522321-3

KMC-522321-6

Actuator K01/K20 Pick-up/blade group control system B - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K01/K20 Pick-up/blade group control system B - Short Cut to Ground

Actuator K21 Blade control shaft A active - Cable break or short circuit to

UB

Actuator K21 Blade control shaft A active - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522326-3

KMC-522326-6

KMC-522327-3

KMC-522327-6

KMC-522330-3

KMC-522330-6

Actuator Q26 Lower feed rocker arm up to year of manufacture 2018 -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator Q26 Lower feed rocker arm up to year of manufacture 2018 -

Short Cut to Ground

Actuator Q27 Raise feed rocker arm up to year of manufacture 2018 -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator Q27 Raise feed rocker arm up to year of manufacture 2018 -

Short Cut to Ground

Actuator Q30 Baling pressure - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator Q30 Baling pressure - Short

Cut to Ground

KMC-522333-3 Actuator K55 Central lubrication grease - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Page 16

Figure

Error number

KMC-522333-6

Error text

Actuator K55 Central lubrication grease - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522338-3

KMC-522338-6

Actuator K38 Pilot valve 1 - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K38 Pilot valve 1 - Short Cut to Ground

Description

KMC-522339-3

KMC-522339-6

Actuator K39 Pilot valve 2 - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K39 Pilot valve 2 - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522341-3

KMC-522341-6

Actuator Q41 Soft core setting -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator Q41 Soft core setting -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522344-3

KMC-522344-6

Actuator K44 Close base coat film packer - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K44 Close base coat film packer - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522345-3

KMC-522345-6

Actuator K45 Open base coat film packer - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K45 Open base coat film packer - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522346-3

KMC-522346-6

Actuator K46 Blade pre-selection -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K46 Blade pre-selection -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522350-3

KMC-522350-6

Actuator Q50 Tying coupling - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator Q50 Tying coupling - Short

Cut to Ground

KMC-522352-3 Actuator Q52 Pilot valve 3 - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Page 17

Figure

Error number

KMC-522352-6

Error text

Actuator Q52 Pilot valve 3 - Short Cut to Ground

Description

KMC-522353-3

KMC-522353-6

Actuator K53 Holding arms on left -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K53 Holding arms on left -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522353-6

KMC-522354-3

Actuator K54 Holding arms on right -

Short Cut to Ground

Actuator K54 Holding arms on right -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

KMC-522373-3

KMC-522373-6

Actuator K73 Additional valve baling pressure - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K73 Additional valve baling pressure - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522375-3

KMC-522375-6

Actuator Q75 Speed bale lifter -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator Q75 Speed bale lifter -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522376-3

KMC-522376-6

Actuator Q76 Direction of motion bale lifter - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator Q76 Direction of motion bale lifter - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522400-3

KMC-522400-6

Engine M2 Tying 2 (active) net -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Engine M2 Tying 2 (active) net -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522401-3

KMC-522401-6

Engine M3 Tying 3 (twine) - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Engine M3 Tying 3 (twine) - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522402-3 Cable break or short circuit to UB

Page 18

Figure

Error number

KMC-522402-3

Error text

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Description

KMC-522420-3

KMC-522420-6

Lamp E20 Working lights net roll -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Lamp E20 Working lights net roll -

Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522421-3

KMC-522421-6

Lamp E21 Working lights chamber film wrapping - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Lamp E21 Working lights chamber film wrapping - Short Cut to Ground

KMC-522422-3

KMC-522422-6

KMC-522431-3

KMC-522431-6

KMC-522433-3

KMC-522433-6

KMC-522456-3

Lamp

- E22 Maintenance lighting side hood left

- E23 Maintenance lighting side hood right

- Cable break or short circuit to UB

Lamp

- E22 Maintenance lighting side hood left

- E23 Maintenance lighting side hood right

- Short Cut to Ground

Lamp

- E31 Working lights wrapping table on left

- E32 Working lights wrapping table on right

- Cable break or short circuit to UB

Lamp

- E31 Working lights wrapping table on left

- E32 Working lights wrapping table on right

- Short Cut to Ground

Lamp

- E33 Rear working lights on left

- E34 Rear working lights on right

- Cable break or short circuit to UB

Lamp

- E33 Rear working lights on left

- E34 Rear working lights on right

- Short Cut to Ground

Actuator K56 Fill clamping hydraulics

- Cable break or short circuit to UB

KMC-522456-6 Actuator K56 Fill clamping hydraulics

- Short Cut to Ground

Page 19

Figure

Error number

KMC-522462-3

Error text

Actuator K12 Raise bale transfer -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

KMC-522462-6

KMC-522463-3

Actuator K12 Raise bale transfer -

Short Cut to Ground

Actuator K13 Lower bale transfer -

Cable break or short circuit to UB

Description

KMC-522463-6

KMC-522471-3

KMC-522471-6

Actuator K13 Lower bale transfer -

Short Cut to Ground

Actuator K03/K21 Blade cassette/ blade group control system A - Cable break or short circuit to UB

Actuator K03/K21 Blade cassette/ blade group control system A - Short

Cut to Ground

KMC-522500-0

KMC-522510-0

KMC-522511-0

The wrong configuration values were saved

Error from force measurement amplifier

1

Measurement amplifier: Timeout of

CAN messages from KMV 1

KMC-522512-0

KMC-522513-0

KMC-522520-0

KMC-522521-0

KMC-522530-0

Error from force measurement amplifier

2

Measurement amplifier: Timeout of

CAN messages from KMV 2

Error from the residual moisture control unit

Timeout for the RMS control unit detected

Error from KMB module 1

Figure

KMC-522531-0

KMC-522532-0

Measurement amplifier: Timeout of

CAN messages from KMB 1

Error from KMB module 2

Page 20

Error number

KMC-522533-0

KMC-522534-0

KMC-522536-0

Error text Description

Measurement amplifier: Timeout of

CAN messages from KMB 2

Error from KMB module 3

Figure

Error from KMB module 4

KMC-522537-0

KMC-522540-0

Measurement amplifier: Timeout of

CAN messages from KMB 4

Error from LMO module 1

KMC-522541-0 Measurement amplifier: Timeout of

CAN messages from LMO 3

KMC-522900-19 TIM status message timeout - CAN disturbance between control units

The TIM status message was not sent or received within the stipulated time.

KMC-522901-19 TIM authentication failed - CAN disturbance between control units

The TIM authentication has failed.

KMC-522902-13

KMC-522903-13

KMC-522904-13

KMC-522905-13

KMC-522906-19

TIM authentication certificate on the certificate blacklist - Values invalid, not plausible or outside the calibration

TIM server uses developer certificates

- Values invalid, not plausible or outside the calibration

TIM function speed not available -

Values invalid, not plausible or outside the calibration

A TIM server certificate is on the AEF

TIM blacklist

The TIM server uses developer certificates.

The TIM function speed is not available.

TIM function valve not available -

Values invalid, not plausible or outside the calibration

TIM function speed timeout - CAN disturbance between control units

The TIM function valve is not available.

The TIM function speed has been terminated due to a timeout.

KMC-522907-19 TIM function valve timeout - CAN disturbance between control units

The TIM function valve has been terminated due to a timeout.

Page 21

17.

Malfunction, cause and remedy

17.6

Setting the tailgate lock

17.6

Setting the tailgate lock

1

2

RPG000-068

If the tailgate no longer closes fully, the tailgate lock must be set on the spring (2).

Make the following setting on the right and left sides of the machine in the same way:

„ Check dimension X of the spring (2).

ð If the dimension is X=340 mm , the setting is correct.

ð If the dimension X is not X=340 mm , the tailgate lock must be set.

„ To set the tailgate lock, release or tighten the nut (1) until the dimension is  X=340 mm .

256

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

18

18.1

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 18

Servicing the brake system 18.1

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

This chapter describes repair, maintenance and adjustment work on the machine which may be performed by qualified technicians only. The chapter "Personnel qualification of the technicians"

must be read and observed in full, refer to page 16

.

WARNING

Risk of injury or damage to the machine due to incorrect repair, maintenance and setting work.

Machines that are not repaired, maintained or set by technicians can exhibit faults caused by a lack of knowledge. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.

„ Only an authorised technician may carry out repair, maintenance and setting work at the machine.

„ Observe the qualification of technicians,

refer to page 16 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of relevant safety notices

If the relevant safety notices are not observed, persons may get seriously injured or killed.

„

To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions must be read and observed, refer to page 15 .

WARNING

Risk of injury due to non-observance of safety instructions

If the relevant safety routines are not observed, persons may be seriously injured or killed.

„ The safety routines must be read and observed to avoid accidents,

refer to page 27

.

Servicing the brake system

WARNING

Risk of injury resulting from damage to the brake system

Damage to the brake system may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents. People may be seriously injured or killed as a result.

„ Adjustment and repair work on the brake system must only be performed by authorised professional workshops or recognised brake services.

„ Have the brakes checked regularly by a specialist workshop.

„ Have damaged or worn brake hoses replaced immediately by a specialist workshop.

„ Irregularities or malfunctions in the brake system must be rectified immediately by a specialist workshop.

„ Only a machine with an intact brake system may be used for work in the field or for travelling on roads.

„ Changes to the brake system must not be made without the approval of KRONE.

„ KRONE does not accept any warranty claims for natural wear, defects caused by overload or changes made to the brake system.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 257

18 Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

18.1

Servicing the brake system

18.1.1

Checking the pad thickness of the brake shoes

The pad thickness of the brake shoes must be at least 2 mm thick.

If the pad thickness is less than 2 mm, the brake pads must be replaced by a KRONE service partner.

18.1.2

Checking the stroke of the brake cylinders

„ Actuate the service brake at full pressure.

„ Check the stroke of the brake cylinders.

Æ If the stoke on the clevis is more than two thirds of the maximum cylinder stroke, the brake must be adjusted.

Max. cylinder stroke for 9“/12“ diaphragm brake cylinders: approx. 60 mm

Max. cylinder stroke for 16“/20“ diaphragm brake cylinders: approx. 75 mm

18.1.3

Setting brake lever on the single axle

Due to the naturally occurring wear of brake drums and brake pads, the brakes must be regularly checked and adjusted.

To ensure correct functioning and adequate brake power, the distance between the brake pad and brake drum must be kept as low as possible. This distance is set on the brake lever.

Brake actuation has been set in the factory. An adjustment is required if

• the braking effect decreases (e.g. due to the brake pads wearing) and/or

• the actuating stroke of the brake cylinder is greater than two thirds of the maximum cylinder stroke.

Max. cylinder stroke for 9“/12“ diaphragm brake cylinders: approx. 60 mm

Max. cylinder stroke for 16“/20“ diaphragm brake cylinders: approx. 75 mm

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü

The pad thickness of the brake shoes must have a minimum thickness, refer to page 258

.

ü The brake drums have been checked,

refer to page 258

.

Setting brake lever (for version with “compressed air brake”)

5 6

1

2

3

X

4

RP000-430

When the brake is actuated (brake pressure greater than 6 bar), the distance X between the bolt middle of the brake lever (2) and plate (4) must be X≤55 mm .

258

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 18

Servicing the brake system 18.1

If the gap X is greater than 55 mm , the brake lever must be adjusted as follows:

„ Unscrew the bolt (1).

„ Detach the brake cylinder (6) from the support / holder and pull out to the rear.

„ Mark the current brake lever position on the brake shaft (2) and on the brake lever.

„ Dismount the retaining ring (3).

„ Loosen the screw connection (4).

„ Remove the brake lever (2) from the brake shaft and move it until the distance, when manually actuated, is  X=50–55 mm .

„ Tighten the screw connection (4).

„ Mount the retaining ring (3).

„ Mount the brake cylinder (6).

„ Check whether the wheels turn freely when the brake is released.

Æ The unbraked wheels must be able to rotate freely without grinding noises.

Setting brake lever (for version with "hydraulic brake")

4

18.1.4

1

2

3

X

RP000-431

When the brake is actuated (brake pressure greater than 100 bar), the distance X between the rear edge of the brake lever (1) and plate (4) must be X≤55 mm .

If the gap X is greater than 55 mm , the brake lever must be adjusted as follows:

„ Mark the current brake lever position on the brake shaft and on the brake lever (1).

„ Dismount the retaining ring (2).

„ Loosen the screw connection (3).

„ Remove the brake lever (1) from the brake shaft and move it until the distance, when manually actuated, is  X=50–55 mm .

„ Tighten the screw connection (3).

„ Mount the retaining ring (2).

„ Check whether the wheels turn freely when the brake is released.

Æ The unbraked wheels must be able to rotate freely without grinding noises.

Setting mechanical slack adjuster on the single axle

Due to the naturally occurring wear of brake drums and brake pads, the brakes must be regularly checked and adjusted.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 259

18 Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

18.1

Servicing the brake system

To ensure correct functioning and adequate brake power, the distance between the brake pad and brake drum must be kept as low as possible. This distance is set on the mechanical slack adjuster.

Brake actuation has been set in the factory. An adjustment is required if

• the braking effect decreases (e.g. due to the brake pads wearing) and/or

• the actuating stroke of the brake cylinder is greater than two thirds of the maximum cylinder stroke.

Max. cylinder stroke for 9“/12“ diaphragm brake cylinders: approx. 60 mm

Max. cylinder stroke for 16“/20“ diaphragm brake cylinders: approx. 75 mm

X

1

Y

2

18.1.5

RP000-685

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü

The pad thickness of the brake shoes must have a minimum thickness, refer to page 258

.

ü The brake drums have been checked,

refer to page 258

.

Setting mechanical slack adjuster

The cylinder stroke X for actuation must be 10–12 % of the length Y of the slack adjuster (2).

„ Measure the length Y of the slack adjuster (2).

„ Turn the screw (1) clockwise until the brake shoes are positioned firmly on the brake drum.

„ Turn the screw (1) anti-clockwise until the cylinder stroke X on the slack adjuster (2) is 10–

12 % of the length Y.

Æ Example: The length Y of the slack adjuster (2) is Y=150 mm . Then the cylinder stroke must be  X=15-18 mm .

„ Ensure that the slack adjusters (2) are set the same on all 2 wheels.

„ Check whether the wheels turn freely when the brake is released.

Æ The unbraked wheels must be able to rotate freely without grinding noises.

Setting transmission linkage and brake lever on the tandem axle

Due to the naturally occurring wear of brake drums and brake pads, the brakes must be regularly checked and adjusted.

To ensure correct functioning and adequate brake power, the distance between the brake pad and brake drum must be kept as low as possible. This distance is set on the transmission linkage and on the brake levers.

Brake actuation has been set in the factory. An adjustment is required if

• the braking effect decreases (e.g. due to the brake shoes wearing) and/or

• the actuating stroke of the brake cylinder W is not within the range of W=25±5 mm .

260

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

X

1

1.1

W

2

3.1

4

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 18

Servicing the brake system 18.1

5 6 7

Z

3.1 3.2

8

10

3.2

8

X

2

1.2

9.1

RP000-433

9.2

Checking the brake

„ Actuate the brake.

ð If the cylinder stroke is  W=25±5 mm , the setting is correct.

ð If the cylinder stroke W is greater than 30 mm, the brake linkage (3.1, 3.2) must be extended.

„ Check whether the wheels turn freely when the brake is released.

ð The unbraked wheels must be able to rotate freely without grinding noises.

ð If the wheels do not rotate freely, the brake linkage (3.1, 3.2) must be shortened.

„ Before putting the brake back into operation, check that the safety installation functions.

Setting brake linkage

If the dimension W is not within the range W=25±5 mm , the brake linkage (3.1, 3.2) must be extended as follows.

ü

The machine is shut down and safeguarded, refer to page 27

.

ü

The pad thickness of the brake shoes must have a minimum thickness, refer to page 258

.

ü The brake drums have been checked,

refer to page 258

.

ü For all settings the compensation lever (5) must be positioned both in the oblong hole (4) at the rear and in the upper area (6) of the support / holder (7).

„ Loosen the respective counter nuts (2) or (8).

„ Turn the respective brake linkage (3.1) or (3.2) so that the respective brake linkage (3.1,

3.2) is extended.

„ Always ensure to change the length of both brake linkages (3.1, 3.2). The brake linkages

(3.1, 3.2) may have to be extended to a varying degree.

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 261

18 Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

18.1

Servicing the brake system

„ Ensure that the dimensions X

1

and X

2

are the same.

„ To be able to check the dimensions X

1

and X

2

, manually press the brake levers (1.1, 1.2) in the direction of the brake position.

„ Check whether the thread projection on the clevises is Z=0

-5

 mm .

ð If the thread projection on the clevises is Z=0

-5

 mm , the setting of the brake linkages (3.1, 3.2) is correct.

ð If the thread projection on the clevises is not Z=0

-5

 mm , the brake levers (1.1, 1.2) must be adjusted.

„ Check whether the wheels turn freely when the brake is released.

Æ The unbraked wheels must be able to rotate freely without grinding noises.

Setting brake levers

1

3

RP000-469

„ Unscrew the bolt (1).

„ Detach the brake linkage (3.1, 3.2) from the support / holder and pull out upwards.

„ Mark the current brake lever setting on the brake shaft.

„ Dismount the retaining ring (3).

„ Remove the brake levers (1.1, 1.2) from the brake shaft and move them by one tooth on the brake shaft.

„ Ensure that the brake levers are moved the same on both sides.

„ Mount the retaining ring (3).

„ Mount the brake linkage (3.1, 3.2).

„

After moving the brake levers (1.1, 1.2), reset the brake linkages, refer to page 261

.

262

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

18.2

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians 18

Car jack contact points 18.2

Car jack contact points

WARNING

Risk of injury due to raised machine

There is a risk to individuals from the machine falling and parts which are swinging in an uncontrolled manner.

„ Use only permitted hoists and slings with a sufficient load-bearing capacity. For the weights, see type plate of the machine.

„ Note the information on the suspension points provided.

„ Make sure the lifting means are properly secured.

„ Never stay under the suspended machine.

„

If work has to be performed under the machine, securely support the machine, refer to page 27 .

The car jack contact points are located on the left and right on the single axle or tandem axle and a marked with a sticker.

Example image of a single axle:

1

RPG000-177

1 Car jack contact point at rear left

Example image of a tandem axle:

2

2 Car jack contact point at rear right

1

RP000-869

1 Car jack contact point at rear left

2

2 Car jack contact point at rear right

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 263

19 Waste disposal

19 Waste disposal

After the service life of the machine has expired, the individual components of the machine must be disposed of properly. The currently applicable country-specific waste disposal directives and the concerning valid laws must be observed.

Metal parts

• All metal parts must be brought to a metal recycling centre.

• The parts must be freed from operating fluids and lubricants (gearbox oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) before being scrapped.

• The operating fluids and lubricants must be brought separately to an environmentally friendly disposal point or recycling centre.

Operating fluids and lubricants

• Operating fluids and lubricants (diesel fuel, coolant, gearbox oil, oil from hydraulic system,

…) must be brought to a disposal point for waste oil.

Synthetic materials

• All synthetic materials must be brought to a recycling centre for synthetic materials.

Rubber

• Rubber parts (hoses, tyres, …) must be brought to a rubber recycling centre.

Electronic scrap

• All electronic parts must be brought to a disposal point for electronic scrap.

264

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

20

20.1

Appendix 20

Hydraulic diagram 20.1

Appendix

Hydraulic diagram

Legend for the following hydraulic diagram

1 Standard equipment 3 For version with "Hydraulic support jack"

2 For version with "Hydraulic blade group control system"

List of the actuators and icons for the following hydraulic diagram

An overview of the position of the sensors, actuators and control units is provided in the circuit diagram.

Icon Actuator

K01

Explanation

Pick-up

K03 Raising/lowering blade cassette

–

–

K20

K21

Q30

Blade group B (for the “Hydraulic blade group control system” version)

Blade group A (for the “Hydraulic blade group control system” version)

Baling pressure (for the “Electronic baling pressure adjustment” version)

Tailgate on the bale chamber

Hydraulic support jack

>>>

2

150 102 705 00 [ }  266]

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 265

Index 21

21 Index

A

Accessing the working screen .......................... 114

Acknowledging error message ......................... 231

Activating TIM functions ................................... 120

Actuating intermediate lubrication .................... 139

Actuator test (terminal) ..................................... 151

Additional equipment and spare parts ................ 16

Adjust drive chains ........................................... 204

Adjusting bale diameter .................................... 116

Adjusting drawbar eye ........................................ 59

Adjusting sensor B08 “Top blade cassette”...... 150

Adjusting sensor B09/B10 “Filling display left/

right” ................................................................. 150

Adjusting sensor B61 “Tying 1 (passive)”......... 151

Adjusting the bearing pressure relief for the pick-up

........................................................................... 81

Adjusting the drawbar height .............................. 48

Adjusting the length of the universal shaft.......... 49

Appendix .......................................................... 265

Applicable documents .......................................... 9

Automatic call of the Road travel screen .......... 115

Auxiliary assignment of a joystick..................... 122

Auxiliary functions (AUX).................................. 121

B

B08 top blade cassette ..................................... 150

Bale diameter

Setting sensor ........................................ 150

Baling pressure adjustment, electronic (terminal)

......................................................................... 133

Basic safety instructions ..................................... 15

Before working on the hydraulic system........... 221

Behavior in the case of voltage flashover of

overhead lines .................................................... 23

Behaviour in dangerous situations and in case of

accidents ............................................................ 27

Blade cassette up

Adjust the sensor ................................... 150

brake disc of the wrapping material brake

Checking and setting axial play...... 173, 210

Bringing the pick-up to transport/working position

........................................................................... 79

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 267

21 Index

C

Car jack contact points ..................................... 263

Carrying out oil level check and oil and filter

element changes safely...................................... 28

Central chain lubrication system

Setting oil quantities on the oil pump ..... 180

Central chain lubrication unit

Oil brush distribution .............................. 217

Central lubrication (Terminal) ........................... 138

Central lubrication unit

Check fill level ........................................ 213

Fill lubricant tank .................................... 213

chamber film wrapping

Checking and setting axial play of the brake

disc ................................................. 173, 210

Checking the retaining comb.................. 177

Locking/releasing the clamping lever ..... 174

Setting conical roller ............................... 175

Setting feed rocker arm .......................... 166

Setting the brake force release during the

feeding process ...................................... 172

Setting the retaining comb ..................... 178

Setting the wrapping material brake....... 170

Setting wrapping material overhang....... 169

Changing mode ................................................ 128

Changing the blades ........................................ 200

Changing the hydraulic oil filter element .......... 222

Changing value ................................................ 127

Checking and adjusting the feed position......... 167

Checking and moving the blade retaining shaft 202

Checking and setting end position for chamber film

wrapping ........................................................... 168

Checking and setting end position for net wrapping

......................................................................... 169

Checking and setting feed rocker arm.............. 166

Checking and setting the axial play of the brake

disc at the wrapping material brake.......... 173, 210

Checking and setting the bale formation conveyor

tension at front.................................................. 165

Checking and setting the position of the feed

rocker arm ........................................................ 166

Checking hydraulic hoses ................................ 194

268

Checking oil level, topping up oil and cleaning filter

......................................................................... 216

Checking rear bale formation conveyor............ 208

Checking road travel lighting ............................ 159

Checking the pad thickness of the brake shoes

......................................................................... 258

Checking the retaining comb for chamber film

wrapping ........................................................... 177

Checking the retaining comb for net wrapping . 176

Checking the screw connections on the drawbar

......................................................................... 197

Checking the stroke of the brake cylinders ...... 258

Checking the tension of the inserted film ........... 95

Checking/adapting the tyre pressure.................. 47

Checking/lubricating the safety rolls of the single

blade locking device ......................................... 204

Checking/maintaining tyres .............................. 191

Children in danger .............................................. 16

Clean the bushing and the drawbar eye........... 196

Cleaning air filter .............................................. 218

Cleaning deflection pipes or conical tying roller 194

Cleaning drive chains ....................................... 197

Cleaning the drawbar eye ................................ 196

Cleaning the machine....................................... 194

Commissioning ................................................... 55

Completing the baling process, starting tying cycle

and ejecting round bales .................................... 73

Compressed air brake

Cleaning air filter .................................... 218

Drain condensation water out of the

compressed-air tank............................... 219

Retighten tensioning straps on the

compressed-air tank............................... 220

Configuring TIM software (terminal) ................. 144

Connecting foreign ISOBUS terminal ................. 64

Connecting hydraulic brake (export) .................. 58

Connecting hydraulic hoses ............................... 57

Connecting KRONE terminal DS 500................. 60

Connecting machine to tractor ........................... 55

Connecting the camera to the KRONE ISOBUS

terminal CCI 800 or CCI 1200 ............................ 66

Connecting the KRONE ISOBUS terminal

(CCI 800, CCI 1200)........................................... 62

Connecting the machine..................................... 16

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Index 21

Connecting the road lighting............................... 66

Connecting/disconnecting compressed air

connections for the compressed air brake ......... 59

Consumables ............................................... 22, 44

Contact ................................................................. 2

Contact data of your dealer .................................. 2

Conversion table ................................................ 12

Counter............................................................. 139

Coupling the hydraulic auxiliary brake................ 58

Crop blockage at the right-hand and left-hand end

of the pick-up ...................................................... 96

Crop blockage in the baling element .................. 98

Crop blockage in the pick-up .............................. 96

Crop blockage under the cutting rotor ................ 97

Crop press roller unit .......................................... 81

Removing baffle sheet ............................. 83

Cross references .................................................. 9

Customer counter ............................................. 140

Cutting unit ......................................................... 84

Unlocking/locking blade retaining shaft .. 201

D

Damaged compressor unit ................................. 24

Damaged hydraulic hoses .................................. 25

Danger associated with welding work ................ 26

Danger resulting from damage to the machine .. 17

Danger when cornering with a machine hitched

and due to the overall width ............................... 21

Danger when driving on road and field............... 21

Danger zone between tractor and machine ....... 19

Danger zone due to trailing machine parts......... 19

Danger zone PTO shaft...................................... 19

Danger zone universal shaft............................... 19

Danger zone when drive is switched on ............. 19

Danger zones ..................................................... 18

Dangers arising from environment ..................... 22

Dangers for road travel....................................... 21

Dangers if the machine is not prepared properly for

road travel .......................................................... 21

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

Working on the machine..................................... 25

Dangers in connection with certain activities:

working on wheels and tyres .............................. 26

Dangers when operating the machine on slopes 22

Data memory ...................................................... 37

Declaration of conformity.................................. 277

Delete all errors ................................................ 156

Delete individual errors..................................... 155

Design DS 500 ................................................. 100

Design of display .............................................. 104

Design of the KRONE machine application...... 104

Diagnostics for digital actuators ....................... 153

Direction display ............................................... 113

Direction display sensitivity (terminal) .............. 134

Directories and references ................................... 9

Displays on the information bar ........................ 113

Displays on the working screen........................ 110

Distribution of the oil brushes on the machine . 217

Distributor blocks of the central lubrication unit 210

Disturbances at the pick-up or during picking up of

crops................................................................. 224

Disturbances at the tying unit or during the tying

cycle ................................................................. 227

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 269

21 Index

Disturbances during or after the baling process

......................................................................... 225

Drain condensation water from the compressed air

tank................................................................... 219

Drive chain of the auger conveyor.................... 207

Drive chain of the bale formation conveyor ...... 206

Drive chain of the intake ................................... 206

Drive chain of the pick-up ................................. 205

Drive chain of the starter roller and the lower

compression roller ............................................ 208

Driving and transport ........................................ 157

E

Ejecting round bales ........................................... 73

Electronic baling pressure adjustment (terminal)

......................................................................... 133

Ensuring functionality of safety devices ............. 20

Environmental protection and disposal .............. 22

Error list ............................................................ 233

Error list (Terminal)........................................... 154

Error Messages ................................................ 230

F

Faults of the electrics/electronics ..................... 230

Figures ............................................................... 10

Filling correction (terminal) ............................... 135

Filling the bale chamber ..................................... 69

Filling the lubricant tank.................................... 213

Fire hazard ......................................................... 22

Fitting wheel chocks ........................................... 77

Foreign ISOBUS terminal ................................. 106

Function description cutting unit ......................... 41

Function description net and chamber film

wrapping ............................................................. 41

Function description net wrapping...................... 40

G

Grinding blades without blade grinding machine

......................................................................... 203

Grinding the blades .......................................... 203

H

Hot liquids........................................................... 24

Hot surfaces ....................................................... 25

How to use this document .................................... 9

Hydraulic diagram ............................................ 265

I

Icons in figures ................................................... 10

Icons in the text .................................................. 10

Identification plate .............................................. 39

Importance of operating instructions .................. 15

Improving bale chamber filling............................ 71

Information for enquiries and orders .............. 2, 39

Information on direction ...................................... 10

Information on This Document ............................. 9

Initial operation ................................................... 45

Insert net ............................................................ 89

Inserting a net or film roll .................................... 90

Inserting the net or film ....................................... 91

Inserting the net roll ............................................ 87

Intended use....................................................... 14

ISOBUS settings (terminal) .............................. 143

J

Jobs on the machine .......................................... 17

K

Keys ................................................................. 108

KRONE ISOBUS terminal (CCI 800, CCI 1200)

......................................................................... 102

KRONE SmartConnect (Terminal) ................... 143

KRONE Terminal DS 500................................... 99

270

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Index 21

L

Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines

........................................................................... 23

Lifting the machine ........................................... 161

Lifting/lowering blade cassette ........................... 84

Liquids under high pressure ............................... 24

Locking screws on the gearboxes .................... 191

Locking/releasing the tension lever .................. 174

Lower the pick-up ............................................... 79

Lubricating greases ............................................ 44

Lubricating the universal shaft.......................... 188

Lubrication chart ............................................... 185

M

Machine description ........................................... 38

Machine overview............................................... 38

Maintaining the central lubrication unit ............. 210

Maintenance ..................................................... 182

Maintenance – After the season....................... 183

Maintenance – Before the season.................... 182

Maintenance – Every 1,000 round bales .......... 184

Maintenance – every 10 hours, at least daily ... 184

Maintenance – Every 2 years ........................... 184

Maintenance – every 50 hours ......................... 184

Maintenance – every 500 hours ....................... 184

Maintenance – once after 10 hours .................. 183

Maintenance – once after 50 hours .................. 184

Maintenance and repair work ............................. 25

Maintenance table ............................................ 182

Malfunction

Baling pressure does not build up .......... 225

Central chain lubrication system: Oil

consumption too high ............................. 229

Central chain lubrication system: Oil

consumption too low .............................. 229

Central chain lubrication system: Oil pump

dry .......................................................... 230

Central chain lubrication: Oil pump not

completely pressed ................................ 230

Crop blockages ...................................... 224

Crops conveyed upwards from the bale

formation conveyor................................. 225

Crops short............................................. 225

Film wraps around spiral roller ............... 229

Film wraps around upper compression roller

229

Machine is running unevenly.................. 225

Net not transported ................................ 228

Pick-up ................................................... 224

Round bale conical................................. 226

Round bale does not roll out of the bale

chamber ................................................. 225

Round bale is barrel-shaped, wrapping

material tears ......................................... 226

Tailgate cannot be opened..................... 226

Tailgate does not close .......................... 226

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 271

21 Index

Wrapping material does not, or not completely, cover one or both of the outer

edges ..................................................... 228

Wrapping material not cut cleanly .......... 228

Wrapping material not transported ......... 227

Wrapping material tears ......................... 227

Wrapping material tears when the net roll or

film roll diameter is reduced ................... 229

Malfunction, cause and remedy ....................... 224

Malfunctions on the chain lubrication unit ........ 229

Manual operation (net and chamber film wrapping,

terminal) ........................................................... 137

Manual operation (net wrapping, terminal) ....... 136

Means of representation..................................... 10

Menu 1 “Number of film layers” (chamber film

wrapping).......................................................... 130

Menu 10 "Manual operation" (for the "Net

wrapping" version)............................................ 136

Menu 10 “Manual operation” (for the “Net and

chamber film wrapping” version) ...................... 137

Menu 11 "Central lubrication" ........................... 138

Menu 13 "Counters" ......................................... 139

Menu 13-1 “Customer counter” ........................ 140

Menu 13-2 "Total counter"................................ 142

Menu 14 "ISOBUS" .......................................... 143

Menu 14-5 "KRONE SmartConnect" ................ 143

Menu 14-6 "Configuring TIM software" (for "TIM

1.0" version) ..................................................... 144

Menu 14-9 "Switching between terminals" ....... 146

Menu 15 "Settings" ........................................... 147

Menu 15-1 "Sensor test"................................... 147

Menu 15-2 "Actuator test"................................. 151

Menu 15-3 "Software info"................................ 154

Menu 15-4 "Error list" ....................................... 154

Menu 3 “Advance signalling” ............................ 131

Menu 4 “Tying start delay” (chamber film wrapping)

......................................................................... 132

Menu 4 “Tying start delay” (net wrapping)........ 131

Menu 6 "Electronic baling pressure

adjustment"....................................................... 133

Menu 8 “Type of tying” (for the “Net and chamber

film wrapping” version) ..................................... 134

Menu Structure ................................................. 124

Menu 1 “Number of net layers” (net wrapping). 130

Menu 7 “Sensitivity of direction display” ........... 134

Menu 9 “Filling correction” ................................ 135

Metric thread screws with control thread .......... 188

Metric thread screws with countersunk head and

hexagon socket ................................................ 190

Metric thread screws with fine thread ............... 189

Mode of operation of TIM 1.0 ........................... 118

Mounting............................................................. 78

Mounting additional deflector sheets in the tailgate

........................................................................... 72

Mounting additional driver guide rails on the starter

roller.................................................................... 72

Mounting hose and cable support ...................... 47

Mounting safety chain ........................................ 67

Mounting the bale ejector ................................... 51

Mounting the universal shaft on the machine ..... 51

Mounting the universal shaft on the tractor ........ 56

Mounting universal shaft bracket........................ 50

Moving bale formation conveyors into the working /

parking position .................................................. 73

Moving deflection roll on the rear bale formation

conveyor ........................................................... 209

272

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Index 21

N

net and chamber film wrapping .......................... 90

Function description ................................. 41

Notes on operation with chamber film

wrapping................................................... 94

net motor position

Setting sensor ........................................ 151

net wrapping ....................................................... 87

Checking and setting axial play of the brake

disc ................................................. 173, 210

Checking the retaining comb.................. 176

Functionality of the ................................... 40

Insert net .................................................. 89

Locking/releasing the clamping lever ..... 174

Setting conical roller ............................... 175

Setting feed rocker arm .......................... 166

Setting the brake force release during the

feeding process ...................................... 172

Setting the wrapping material brake....... 170

Setting wrapping material overhang....... 169

Tying start delay ..................................... 132

Net wrapping and chamber film wrapping

Inserting the net or film............................. 91

Noise may damage your health.......................... 24

Notes on operation ............................................. 94

Notes with information and recommendations ... 12

Number of film layers (chamber film wrapping,

terminal) ........................................................... 130

Number of net layers (net wrapping, terminal) . 130

O

Oil brush distribution......................................... 217

Oils ..................................................................... 44

Only perform work when the machine is at

standstill ............................................................. 25

Operating brake force regulator ......................... 79

Operating machine via joystick......................... 121

Operating the hydraulic blade group control system

......................................................................... 116

Operating the support jack ................................. 73

Operating TIM 1.0 (Tractor Implement

Management) ................................................... 118

Operation............................................................ 69

Operation is only allowed after proper start-up .. 17

Operational safety: Technically sound condition 17

Overload protections on the machine................. 38

Overview of fuses ............................................. 232

P

Parking the machine......................................... 158

Parking the machine safely ................................ 22

Passengers ........................................................ 17

Pausing TIM functions ...................................... 121

Performing a visual inspection ......................... 194

Personal protective equipment ........................... 20

Personnel qualification of the operating personnel

........................................................................... 15

Personnel qualification of the technicians .......... 16

Pick-up ............................................................... 79

Setting the working height ........................ 80

Position and meaning of safety labels ................ 30

Possible error types (FMI) ................................ 231

Preparation before baling ................................... 69

Preparing the brake disc of the wrapping material

brake .................................................................. 47

Preparing the machine for road travel .............. 158

Preparing the machine for shipment ................ 160

Pre-signalling (terminal) ................................... 131

Protecting brake disc of the wrapping material

brake from corrosion ........................................ 197

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 273

21 Index

R

Raise the pick-up................................................ 79

Raised machine and machine parts ................... 26

Rear bale formation conveyor

Moving deflection roll ............................. 209

Reasonably foreseeable misuse ........................ 14

Recurring icons ................................................ 125

Reducing the pressure on the side walls of the

bale chamber...................................................... 71

Releasing the baling pressure .......................... 133

Releasing the cam clutch on the universal shaft

......................................................................... 200

Releasing/applying the parking brake ................ 76

Remedying sensor/actuator error ..................... 232

Removing ........................................................... 78

Removing crop blockages .................................. 96

Removing/mounting the baffle sheet on the crop

press roller unit ................................................... 83

Removing/mounting the safety device which

prevents unauthorised use ................................. 78

Re-ordering .......................................................... 9

Repairs, maintenance and settings by technicians

......................................................................... 257

Retighten tensioning straps at the compressed air

tank................................................................... 220

Road safety ........................................................ 21

Road travel screen (automatic call-up)............. 115

Running actuator test ......................................... 28

274

S

Safety ................................................................. 14

Safety equipment ............................................... 34

Safety labels on the machine ............................. 29

Safety markings on the machine ........................ 21

Safety routines ................................................... 27

Scope of delivery ................................................ 45

Scope of the document ...................................... 10

Securing raised machine and machine parts

against lowering ................................................. 27

Securing the guide wheels of the pick-up......... 161

Securing the side hoods ................................... 160

Securing the storage compartment flap ........... 161

Securing the universal shaft ............................. 158

Selecting a menu.............................................. 126

Selecting a menu Level .................................... 126

Selection of tying method (net and chamber film

wrapping, terminal) ........................................... 134

Sensitivity of direction display (Terminal) ......... 134

Sensor test ....................................................... 148

Sensor test (terminal) ....................................... 147

Service life of the machine ................................. 15

Servicing chain lubrication unit ......................... 216

Servicing compressed air brake (for version with

"Compressed air brake") .................................. 218

Servicing the brake system .............................. 257

Servicing the hydraulic system ......................... 221

Servicing the main gearbox .............................. 193

Setting B09/B10 sensor filling display on left/right

......................................................................... 150

Setting B61 sensor tying 1 (passive) ................ 151

Setting brake lever (for version with "hydraulic

brake") .............................................................. 259

Setting brake lever (for version with “compressed

air brake”) ......................................................... 258

Setting brake lever on the single axle .............. 258

Setting conical roller for net wrapping and chamber

film wrapping .................................................... 175

Setting mechanical slack adjuster on the single

axle ................................................................... 259

Setting oil quantities for the central chain

lubrication unit .................................................. 180

Setting the baffle sheet on the crop press roller unit

........................................................................... 82

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Index 21

Setting the bale diameter ................................. 163

Setting the baling pressure............................... 163

Setting the brake force release when feeding

wrapping material ............................................. 172

Setting the crop press roller unit......................... 82

Setting the cutting length .................................. 165

Setting the density of the bale core .................. 163

Setting the double rocker arm .......................... 163

Setting the lock of the tapered roller................. 175

Setting the pick-up working height ..................... 80

Setting the retaining comb for chamber film

wrapping ........................................................... 178

Setting the scraper and stone deflector............ 198

Setting the scraper to the spiral roller............... 198

Setting the stone deflectors .............................. 200

Setting the tailgate lock .................................... 256

Setting the working lights ................................. 179

Setting transmission linkage and brake lever on

the tandem axle ................................................ 260

Setting units on the terminal ............................. 105

Setting wrapping material brake ....................... 170

Setting wrapping material overhang ................. 169

Settings ............................................................ 163

Settings (terminal) ............................................ 147

Shutting down and safeguarding the machine ... 27

SmartConnect (Terminal) ................................. 143

SMV emblem ...................................................... 36

Software info (Terminal) ................................... 154

Solenoid valves ................................................ 222

Sources of danger on the machine .................... 24

Starting tying ...................................................... 73

Status line......................................................... 107

Structural modifications on the machine ............ 16

Support jack ....................................................... 73

Switching between terminals ............................ 146

Switching between the terminals ...................... 146

Switching terminal on/off ............................ 99, 103

Swivelling blade groups in/out ............................ 84

T

tandem axle

Setting brake linkage.............................. 260

Target group of this document ............................. 9

Technical data .................................................... 42

Technical limit values ......................................... 18

Technically sound state of the machine ............. 17

Term “machine” .................................................. 10

Terminal

Actuator test ........................................... 151

Baling pressure adjustment, electronic .. 133

Central lubrication .................................. 138

Configuring TIM software ....................... 144

Counter .................................................. 139

Direction display sensitivity .................... 134

Error list .................................................. 154

Filling correction ..................................... 135

ISOBUS settings .................................... 143

Manual operation (net and chamber film

wrapping) ............................................... 137

Manual operation (net wrapping) ........... 136

Number of film layers ............................. 130

Number of net layers .............................. 130

Pre-signalling ......................................... 131

Select menu level ................................... 126

Select tying method (net and chamber film

wrapping) ............................................... 134

Sensor test ............................................. 147

Setting units ........................................... 105

Settings .................................................. 147

SmartConnect ........................................ 143

Software info .......................................... 154

Switching between terminals.................. 146

Switching between the terminals............ 146

Tying in the menu level .......................... 129

Tying start delay (chamber film wrapping) ....

132

Tying start delay (net wrapping) ............. 132

Terminal machine functions ............................. 107

Terminal menus................................................ 124

Tightening torque: wheel nuts .......................... 192

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 275

21 Index

Tightening torques............................................ 188

TIM

Keys on the working screen ................... 119

Mode of operation .................................. 118

TIM displays and keys on the working screen.. 119

Total counter .................................................... 142

Touchable display ...................................... 99, 102

Tying in the menu level .................................... 129

Tying start delay (chamber film wrapping, terminal)

......................................................................... 132

Tying start delay (net wrapping, terminal) ........ 132

U

Universal shaft.................................................... 49

Adjusting the length of the........................ 49

Unlocking/locking blade retaining shaft ............ 201

Unsuitable consumables .................................... 22

Using the bale ejector......................................... 96

Using the stop cock of the tailgate ..................... 76

V

Validity .................................................................. 9

Varying functions to KRONE ISOBUS terminal 106

W

Warning signs..................................................... 11

Warnings of property damage/environmental

damage .............................................................. 12

Waste disposal ................................................. 264

Working at or on heights of the machine ............ 25

276

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en

Declaration of conformity 22

22 Declaration of conformity

EC Declaration of Conformity

We

Maschinenfabrik Krone Beteiligungs-GmbH

Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10, D-48480 Spelle hereby declare, as manufacturer of the product named below, under our sole responsibility, that the

Machine:

Series:

Round Baler

RP801-31 to which this declaration refers is in compliance with the following relevant provisions of:

• EC Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery)

• EU Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC) The harmonised standard EN ISO 14982:2009 has been applied in accordance with the directive.

The signing Managing Director is authorised to compile the technical documents.

Spelle, 01/08/2017

Year of manufacture:

Dr.-Ing. Josef Horstmann

(Managing Director, Design & Development)

Machine no.:

Comprima V 150 XC Plus

Original Operating Instructions 150001178_00_en 277

Maschinenfabrik

Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

* Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10

D-48480 Spelle

* Postfach 11 63

D-48478 Spelle

' +49 (0) 59 77 / 935-0

6 +49 (0) 59 77 / 935-339

ü

www.landmaschinen.krone.de